User Manual - Squarespace
User Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-NS700
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product.
KX-NS700: PFMPR Software File Version 004.10000 or later
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/
Feature Highlights
Feature Highlights
Easy Operation
IP Communication
This PBX supports IP communication using
a variety of IP telephones, such as the KX-NT300/
KX-NT500 series with Self Labelling and/or
Bluetooth wireless headsets, Panasonic IP
Softphones, and SIP phones.
R
IP Proprietary
Telephone
If you are using a certain Panasonic telephone
that is equipped with a Navigator Key/Jog Dial
and a display, it helps you to access the desired
feature easily. Also, you will be informed of the
arrival of an incoming call or a message waiting
by the lamp if it is equipped.
ENTER
Navigator Key
IP Softphone
Jog Dial
Message/Ringer Lamp
SIP phone
Consult your dealer
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
(Page 14)
Remote Office
Cellular Phone Features
This PBX supports the use of SIP phones
connected from a remote office over an IP network
through an SBC (session border controller).
SIP phones can be set up by simply connecting
the phones to the LAN at the remote office.
This PBX supports the use of cellular phones
with the PBX. Cellular phones can make and
receive calls as if they were registered
extensions.
IP Network
Consult your dealer
2
User Manual
1.15 Cellular Phone Features (Page 262)
Feature Highlights
Wireless System
Built-in Unified Messaging
This PBX optionally supports a Portable Station
(PS) system. PSs can be used in the PBX
with other wired telephones.
You can set incoming calls to be redirected
to your mailbox to let callers leave voice
messages when you are unable to answer
the phone. You can access your mailbox to
listen to the messages when you are away from
the office as well.
Hello, this
is John Smith.
Please
leave your
message.
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired
Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
(Page 213)
Call Centre
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
(Page 141)
Communication Assistant (CA)
This PBX offers a built-in Call Centre feature
called Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group.
Incoming calls to an ICD Group can be queued
or redirected to a preprogrammed destination,
answered in order of priority and monitored by
a supervisor extension.
CA Client users can connect to the PBX without
using an external server. CA Client users can
make calls by clicking in a phonebook on their
PC, as well as use many other features.
PC
(Client)
ICD Group
Customers
Queuing
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre (Page 217)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
User Manual
3
Feature Highlights
CA Call Accounting
This application can calculate call cost estimates
and track call activity for calls that are made
through the PBX. Installing the CA Call
Accounting web server software allows you to
access CA Call Accounting from any PC by using
a web client. You can sort and view, print, or
export call information with the web client.
In addition, reports can be created based on
exported data.
PC
(Client)
PC
(Web Server)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
In This Manual,
• The following abbreviations are used:
•
•
•
APT ® Analogue Proprietary Telephone
Display PT ® Proprietary Telephone with a Display
DPT ® Digital Proprietary Telephone
IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone
PS ® Portable Station
PT ® Proprietary Telephone
SIP extension/SIP Extn. ® Extensions of the PBX which uses Session Initiation Protocol for
communication.
SLT ® Single Line Telephone
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent IP-PT, DPT, APT and Display PT.
The suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS700NE) is omitted.
The following icons are used frequently.
!!
Hints
Conditions
Functional Limitation
Depending on the PBX’s software version, some features may not function. For details about which versions
support these features, consult your dealer.
Notice
•
•
•
4
This PBX supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones. However, some PBX features may not be
available for SIP phones, depending on your telephone type.
Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
User Manual
Feature Highlights
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks
NOTES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
This manual provides basic information on how you can access commonly used PBX functions with
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable stations (PSs), SIP phones, and DSS
Consoles. For detailed information about each feature or setting, consult your dealer.
In this manual, several kinds of PTs appear, as follows:
– IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
– Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
– Analogue Proprietary Telephone (APT)
– Proprietary Telephone with a Display (Display PT)
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent all of these PTs. If a PBX feature only supports specific PTs,
such as IP-PTs, the available telephone types are clearly indicated.
IP-PTs/SIP extensions may become busy and you may not be able to make or receive calls, depending
on the network status.
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, consult your dealer.
Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of © 2010 Copyrights Vision Inc.
Notes for SIP Phone Users
Before using a SIP phone, please read the following notes.
For All SIP phone users
A tone may not be heard during an operation depending on the type of SIP phone being used. The following
operation is an example. However, for KX-UT series SIP phones, a tone may be heard depending on the
system settings. For details, consult your administrator.
[Example]
To use an account code (Account Code Entry)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
Press Account or
enter 49.
Off-hook.
D.Tone
9
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
SIP phone users will not
hear this tone.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
User Manual
5
Feature Highlights
For KX-UT series SIP phone users
a. Operations that use feature numbers are limited. Also, flexible buttons are only available for certain
KX-UT series SIP phone models. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation.
b. A maximum of 32 digits can be input on a KX-UT series SIP phone at one time, including feature numbers,
etc.
c. To execute certain operations, you may be required to press the ENTER button on a KX-UT series SIP
phone during the operation.
The following 5 operations are examples.
[Examples]
To select an idle outside line automatically
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(L-CO)
/ 9
0
Off-hook.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
outside
phone no.
OR
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
Talk.
Dial outside phone
number.
To call with a verification code
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Enter
Off-hook.
verification code PIN
7
verification code
Enter
47.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
To transfer to an outside party using the PBX service
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
outside line
C.Tone
OR
HOLD
KX-UT series
only.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
6
User Manual
*
outside
phone no.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
Feature Highlights
To establish a conference call
KX-UT series
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Dial desired phone
number.
Press CONFERENCE.
Talk with multiple
parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
To set/cancel Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
0
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
3
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
4
Intercom Calls
5
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
After entering 0 for "Cancel",
for KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
Go on-hook
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
For KX-UT series:
max. 26 digits
For non-KX-UT series SIP phone users
a. The following features are available for SIP phone users:
– Making calls
– Answering calls
– Holding calls
– Transferring calls (You cannot go on-hook before the transferred party answers.)
b. The available operations using feature numbers are limited. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the
top left of each operation.
c. The tones listed in "5.4.1 What is This Tone?" are not available for SIP phone users. Tones or the tone
types may vary depending on the type of telephone being used. For example, when you put a call on hold,
a specific tone for the SIP phone may be heard, or no tone may be heard.
d. Any number pressed while hearing a Busy/DND/Reorder tone, such as the feature number to activate
Automatic Callback Busy, will be ignored.
e. The operations for SIP phones may differ from the steps in this manual, and may vary depending on the
type of telephone being used.
User Manual
7
Feature Highlights
f. To execute an operation, some SIP phones may require that the OK button is pressed after pressing all
the buttons of the operation.
Notes for KX-WT115 PS Users
The operation and display of the KX-WT115 may differ from KX-TCA series PSs. For example, when the
KX-WT115 is not answered while using it in parallel with a wired telephone, the display of incoming call log is
different from that of the display of KX-TCA series PSs.
Notes for KX-NT300 Series, KX-NT500 Series, and KX-UT Series Users
If the primary PBX to which your telephone is connected fails, the extension may automatically switch its
connection to a secondary PBX.
• The time required to switch to the secondary PBX or back to the primary PBX is different depending on
the type of your telephone.
• When the extension switches its connection to the secondary PBX, your call will be disconnected if you
are on a call.
• Even if the primary PBX becomes available again, your telephone will not reconnect to it if you are on a
call.
• For KX-NT300 series and KX-NT500 series users, if background music (BGM) is being played through
your telephone while it is connected to the secondary PBX, it will not reconnect to the primary PBX when
it becomes available.
Notes for KX-NT543, KX-NT546, and KX-NT560 IP-PT Users
•
While using a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, IP network transmission speed
is relatively slow and the secondary Ethernet port cannot be used. To disable ECO mode, consult your
dealer.
Trademarks
•
•
•
•
Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use
of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Open Source Software
This product uses Open Source Software. For details, click the Information button in Web Maintenance
Console.
8
User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Operation ................................................................................................13
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
Before Operating the Telephones .................................................................................14
For Your Safety ..............................................................................................................14
Important Safety Instructions ..........................................................................................19
Precautions ....................................................................................................................20
Data Security ..................................................................................................................22
Before Operating the Telephones ..................................................................................23
Making Calls ....................................................................................................................32
Basic Calling ...................................................................................................................32
Easy Dialling ...................................................................................................................37
Redial .............................................................................................................................40
When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer ...................................................41
Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access) .....................................................50
Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice) ....................................51
Calling without Restrictions ............................................................................................52
To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access
[DISA]) ............................................................................................................................53
Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote
Setting) ...........................................................................................................................56
Receiving Calls ................................................................................................................57
Answering Calls ..............................................................................................................57
Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback) ..........................................................58
Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup) ......................................59
Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station
[TAFAS]) .........................................................................................................................61
Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button ..........................................................................62
Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID]) ....................64
During a Conversation ....................................................................................................65
Transferring a Call (Call Transfer) ..................................................................................65
Holding a Call .................................................................................................................72
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting) ..........................................................78
Answering Call Waiting ..................................................................................................80
Multiple Party Conversation ...........................................................................................86
Mute ...............................................................................................................................97
Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor) .............................98
Using the Headset (Headset Operation) ........................................................................99
Using a PDN/SDN Button .............................................................................................101
Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
Extension ......................................................................................................................101
Before Leaving Your Desk ...........................................................................................105
Forwarding Calls ..........................................................................................................105
Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message) ................116
Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock) ..............118
Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM]) ............................120
Making/Answering an Announcement ........................................................................131
Paging ..........................................................................................................................131
Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement ..............................................................133
Making a Conference Group Call .................................................................................134
Using the Unified Messaging Features .......................................................................141
What is the Unified Messaging system? ......................................................................141
Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox ................................................................142
Message Playback and Related Features ....................................................................152
User Manual
9
Table of Contents
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
1.9.8
1.9.9
1.9.10
1.9.11
1.9.12
1.9.13
1.9.14
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
1.11.5
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.2
1.14
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.14.3
1.14.4
1.15
1.15.1
Sending Messages .......................................................................................................160
Transferring Calls .........................................................................................................170
Other Features .............................................................................................................178
Quick Reference ...........................................................................................................195
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs ......................................................198
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder) ............................................................................198
Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND]) .........................................................200
Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA) ..........................................................................................................................204
Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP]) ...........................................205
Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR]) ......................................................206
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line
Identification Restriction [CLIR]) ...................................................................................207
Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Deny) ............................................................................................................................208
Turning on the Background Music (BGM) ....................................................................209
Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security) ..........................210
Checking the Time Service Status ...............................................................................211
Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone) ..............................212
Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode) ...........................................................................................................................213
Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (One-numbered
extension) .....................................................................................................................214
Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear) ...........................215
Utilising the Call Centre ................................................................................................217
Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up) .....................217
Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming
Call Distribution Group Monitor) ...................................................................................220
Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection) ..............................................223
Using User-supplied Equipment ..................................................................................224
If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected ..................................................................224
If an External Relay is Connected ................................................................................226
If an External Sensor is Connected ..............................................................................227
If a Host PBX is Connected ..........................................................................................228
If a Voice Processing System is Connected .................................................................229
Administrative Features ...............................................................................................236
Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features) ..................236
Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message) ............243
Exchanging the Settings between Extensions ...........................................................244
Walking Extension ........................................................................................................244
Enhanced Walking Extension .......................................................................................245
Using a Telephone with a Display ...............................................................................247
Using the Call Log ........................................................................................................247
Using the Directories ....................................................................................................251
Accessing System Features (System Feature Access) ...............................................257
Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
only) ..............................................................................................................................259
Cellular Phone Features ...............................................................................................262
Cellular Phone Features ...............................................................................................262
2 Manager Operation ..............................................................................267
2.1
2.1.1
10
Control Features ...........................................................................................................268
Extension Control .........................................................................................................268
User Manual
Table of Contents
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Time Service Mode Control ..........................................................................................269
Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer) .............................................................271
Turning on the External Background Music (BGM) ......................................................272
Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM) ........................................................................273
Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out) .....................275
Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor ......................................276
Configuring Unified Messaging Features ...................................................................277
System Manager Features ...........................................................................................277
Message Manager Features ........................................................................................290
3 Customising Your Phone & System ...................................................307
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) ..................................................308
Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) .....................................................308
Settings on the Programming Mode .............................................................................310
Customising the Buttons ..............................................................................................320
System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console .........................................325
User Programming .......................................................................................................325
4 Customising Extensions and the System–for Managers .................351
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Manager Programming .................................................................................................352
Programming Information .............................................................................................352
Manager Programming .................................................................................................353
Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control ..............................................................................355
5 Appendix ...............................................................................................363
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
List of Operations by Telephone Type ........................................................................364
List of Operations by Telephone Type .........................................................................364
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................372
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................372
Feature Number Table ..................................................................................................376
Feature Number Table .................................................................................................376
What is This Tone? .......................................................................................................387
What is This Tone? ......................................................................................................387
Revision History ............................................................................................................391
PFMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx ....................................................................391
PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ....................................................................391
User Manual
11
Section 1
Operation
This section shows you step by step how to use each
feature. Read this chapter to become familiar with the
many useful features of this PBX.
User Manual
13
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Jog Dial
Volume Key
Up
Left
(anti-clockwise)
Right
(clockwise)
Level decreases
Level increases
(Level increases)
Up
(Level increases)
Down
Down
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the PBX.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension depending on system programming and the type of
telephone being used.
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to use the features.
This feature cannot be used with a
single line telephone.
(CO)
OR
0 /
See "Programming" for Related
Programming if necessary.
9
OR
8
outside line
group no.
Seize an outside line (One of
the following).
• Press the CO button.
• Dial automatic line access
number 0/9.
• Dial outside line group
access number and
outside line group number.
Off-hook (One of the following).
• Lift the handset.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
(To start talking, lift the
handset.)
• Press TALK button.
Press the Call button on the
Doorphone.
On-hook (One of the following).
• Hang up.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
• Press CANCEL button.
Press the hookswitch lightly.
Press the corresponding feature
button on the proprietary telephone
or KX-UT series SIP phone.
Talk or make an
announcement.
User Manual
25
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
desired no.
Enter the required number.
<Example>
You will hear a busy,
confirmation, dial, ring or
ringback tone.
B. Tone: Busy Tone
C. Tone: Confirmation Tone
D. Tone: Dial Tone
R. Tone: Ring Tone
R. B. Tone: Ringback Tone
account code
Enter the account code.
extension no.
Dial an extension number.
phone no.
Dial the telephone number.
outside
phone no.
dial key
Press the HOLD button on your SIP
phone.
HOLD
REDIAL
Dial outside phone number.
Press any dial key (0–9,
, #).
Press the REDIAL button on
your SIP phone.
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX-UT Series SIP
Phone
Panasonic proprietary telephones and KX-UT series SIP phones have useful feature buttons that simplify some
operations. For details, refer to the "Location of Controls" or equivalent section in the documentation for your
phone.
Customised Buttons
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this manual, it means a flexible button has been made into an
"Account" button. For more information, refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons" when using a PT or PS, or
"Customising the Flexible Buttons" when using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
• KX-UT113/KX-UT123: Customised buttons are not available.
• Other than KX-UT113/KX-UT123: The following buttons can be customised:
–
–
–
–
–
Single-CO (S-CO)
DN
One-touch Dialling
Log-in/Log-out
DSS
Button
26
–
–
–
–
Headset
Wrap-up
Call Park
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
Feature
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Used to access an idle outside line for making outside calls.
Incoming outside calls from any outside line arrive at this button.
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle outside line in a specified outside line group for
making outside calls.
Incoming calls from outside lines in the assigned outside line group arrive
at this button.
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified outside line for making or receiving outside
calls.
User Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Feature
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Used to access an extension with one touch.
It is also possible to be changed to the other feature button.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), unlike a
One-Touch button, this type of button cannot be used to dial feature
numbers.
One-touch Dialling
Used to access a desired party or system feature with one touch.
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or
receiving calls.
Message
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left
the message waiting indication.
Message for Another
Extension
Used to have a Message button for another extension.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Used to forward all calls to a specified destination or refuse.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Used to forward outside calls to a specified destination or refuse.
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Used to forward intercom calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Group FWD—Both calls
Used to forward all the calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Used to forward the outside calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Used to forward the intercom calls to your group to a specified destination.
Account
Used to enter an account code.
Conference
Used to establish a multiple party conversation.
Terminate
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging
up.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Used to access special features offered by a host PBX or a telephone
company.
Call Charge Reference
Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.
Call Park
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset parking zone.
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Used to park a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), pressing
this button selects an idle parking zone from among the Call Park (preset
parking zone) buttons configured on the phone. Set both the Call Park
(Automatic Park Zone) button and the Call Park (Preset Parking Zone)
button.
Call Log
Used to show the incoming call information.
Call Log for ICD Group
Used to have a Call Log button for incoming call distribution group.
Log-in/Log-out
Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.
Log-in/Log-out of a specified
group
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for another incoming call distribution
group.
User Manual
27
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
28
Feature
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for all groups.
Hurry-up
Used to transfer the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call
distribution group to the overflow destination.
Wrap-up
Used to switch the wrap-up status, Ready and Not Ready mode.
System Alarm
Used to confirm a PBX error.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Used to switch the time service mode.
Answer
Used to answer an incoming call.
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete
a Call Transfer.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
Used to change the toll restriction/call barring level of other extension users
temporarily.
ISDN Service
Used to access an ISDN service.
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR services.
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Used to switch between the COLP and COLR services.
ISDN-Hold
Used to transfer a call using telephone company.
Headset
Used to talk using the headset.
Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual)
Used to switch the time service mode, Automatic or Manual.
Two-way Record
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension.
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension with
one touch.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving
a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Voice Mail Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. Also used
to access the Unified Messaging system or the voice mail features of a
VPS with one touch.
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Used to access an extension connected to other PBXs in the network with
one touch.
CTI
Used to access CTI features.
Check-in
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
Check-out
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
Cleaned-up
Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and Not
Ready.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls.
User Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Feature
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension,
and pick up or transfer calls to it.
Directory Number (DN)
(KX-UT series SIP phones
[except KX-UT113/
KX-UT123] only)
Used to make intercom or outside calls.
How to Follow the Steps
An example of system operation is shown below.
Calling Another Extension
Feature title
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
Telephone types
The abbreviations of
telephone types
are explained in
"Telephone types in
procedures" below.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
Talk.
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
Operation steps
The description of the
icons are explained on
"Icon Descriptions".
Conditions
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hints
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SPPHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.
Telephone types in procedures
The following abbreviations are displayed at the top left of each procedure and indicate which types of
telephones support the operation. However, in some cases a specific model number is given instead (e.g.,
KX-UT136, KX-UT series).
User Manual
29
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Abbreviation
PT
30
Telephone Type
Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series,
KX-NT265, KX-T7700 series)
DPT
Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series,
KX-DT500 series)
Display PT
Proprietary Telephone with a Display (e.g. KX-NT346, KX-NT546,
KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
PS
Portable Station (e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT115)
SIP Extn.
SIP phone (e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones)
SLT
Single Line Telephone (e.g., KX-T7710)
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2 Making Calls
1.2.1 Basic Calling
–
–
–
–
Calling Another Extension
Calling an Outside Party
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
Calling Another Extension
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
OR
*
(SDN)
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
Dial extension number,
or press DSS or SDN.
Talk.
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
* You have to press the SDN button once or twice depending on the mode of the SDN button.
For details, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number
(SDN) Extension".
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the
SP-PHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select
•
32
User Manual
the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To call an operator (Operator Call)
You can call an extension or a group assigned as the operator.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
OR
0
Off-hook.
•
Enter 9 or 0.
The operator call number (default) varies depending on country/area.
Calling an Outside Party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are made
via your PBX.
Select one of the following methods:
To select an idle outside line automatically (Automatic Line Access)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(L-CO)
OR
0
Off-hook.
•
/ 9
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
The automatic line access number (default) varies depending on country/area.
To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically (Outside Line
Group Access)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(G-CO)
OR
8
Off-hook.
outside line
group no.
Press G-CO or enter outside line
group access number and then
outside line group number (2 digits).
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
User Manual
33
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To select the specified outside line
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
outside
phone no.
(S-CO)
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press S-CO.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
Each of the S-CO button or G-CO button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The line is idle.
Red on: The line is in use.
You may be restricted from making a call to the specified outside party. To make a call, refer
to "1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions".
To confirm number before dialling, you can enter a phone number and confirm it on the
display and then go off-hook. (Predialling)
Call Charge Reference
You can confirm your total call charges by pressing the Call Charge Reference button.
To make a call to another party without going on-hook, press the FLASH/RECALL button.
It will re-access the outside line and provide external dial tone. Pressing the Terminate button
will provide intercom dial tone. You can dial the new phone number without going on/off-hook.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an outside call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the
SP-PHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select
•
the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Loop-CO (L-CO) button, a Group-CO (G-CO) button, a Single-CO (S-CO)
button, a Terminate button or a Call Charge Reference button.
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
You can access extensions connected to other PBXs in a private network.
To call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
*
OR
7
Off-hook.
34
User Manual
private phone no.
*
Dial extension number or
enter 7 and then dial private phone number.
Talk.
1.2.1 Basic Calling
•
* Which type of telephone number must be entered depends on the settings of your PBX.
To call with one touch
PT/PS
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
•
Talk.
Press NDSS.
To start monitoring another PBX extension after customising an NDSS button, go
off-hook, press the NDSS button, and go on-hook.
The NDSS button light will show the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: The extension is busy.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
You may give a specified account code to extension users and check their telephone usage. You can specify
an account code for each client and check the call duration.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
Press Account or
enter 49.
Off-hook.
D.Tone
9
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
User Manual
35
1.2.1 Basic Calling
•
•
•
•
•
A Panasonic proprietary telephone extension user can enter an account code during a
conversation and when hearing reorder tone after the other party hangs up.
Account codes may use the digits "0" through "9".
Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter an account code to
make an outside call.
If you enter the wrong code, press the " " key and re-enter the account code.
For your convenience, you can store the code with the phone number in the memory (e.g.,
Speed Dialling).
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Account button.
36
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
This is convenient for frequently dialled phone numbers.
–
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
–
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
–
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
You can store a phone number into the flexible button for one-touch operation.
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(One-touch
Dialling)
Off-hook.
Press One-touch
Dialling.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the desired phone number or feature
number.
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
You can store up to 100 numbers at your extension for your personal use.
This feature is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
0
30.
personal speed
dialling no.
desired
phone no.
Enter personal speed
dialling number
(2 digits).
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter #.
Enter outside line access number
before outside phone number.
User Manual
37
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
To dial
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
Off-hook.
•
•
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
Enter
.
Dial personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For SIP phone users: Telephones display only personal speed dialling numbers.
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
You can make calls using speed dialling numbers stored in the PBX.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
system speed
dialling no.
OR
Off-hook.
•
•
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
Dial system speed
dialling number (3 digits).
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For SIP phone users: Telephones display only system speed dialling numbers.
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you have preprogrammed your phone.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/PS
7
Off-hook.
Enter
4
740.
0
2
Enter 2.
desired
phone no.
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
Enter outside line access number
before outside phone number.
38
User Manual
On-hook.
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
1
7
Enter
Off-hook.
4
0
740.
Set
OR
0
Cancel
C.Tone
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
On-hook.
To dial
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
•
•
•
To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the preprogrammed
number is dialled.
You should assign the intercom line as the seized line when going off-hook. (Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing)
It is possible to increase the delay before Hot Line is activated through system programming.
This can be useful if you require more time after going off-hook to dial another telephone
number or extension number.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
You can make a call simply by pressing the preprogrammed number for quick dialling.
PT
and SLT
PT/SLT/PS/SIP
Extn.
quick dialling no.
Off-hook.
•
Dial quick dialling
number (max. 8 digits).
This is a useful feature for hotels.
For example, to dial Room Service, dial the digit "3", not the full extension number.
User Manual
39
1.2.3 Redial
1.2.3 Redial
This is convenient when calling the same outside party again.
–
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
OR
REDIAL
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
40
User Manual
Press REDIAL or enter #.
Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialled.
After pressing REDIAL, if you hear a busy tone again, press REDIAL to retry.
If you want to log outgoing intercom calls to the outgoing call log, consult your System
Installer.
If you have seized a trunk, pressing the REDIAL button will be ignored if the last number you
dialled was an extension.
Automatic Redial
To redial automatically, press the SP-PHONE button and then the REDIAL button, or press
the REDIAL button directly. It will keep trying the busy number until the called party answers
or until a specified timeout.
You can perform other tasks during dialling. To cancel, press the FLASH/RECALL button.
Some outside lines may not support this feature.
This feature is not available for the KX-T7665 or PS.
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To clear message waiting indications left on your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enter
0
70.
0
Enter 0.
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
The Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp shows the current status as follows:
Off: No message
Red on: You have a message.
The display shows the messages starting with the most recent call.
At a called extension, the MESSAGE button allows you to clear message waiting indications
if you do not want to call the callers back. To clear, press the MESSAGE button and then
press the soft button. This operation cannot be performed using KX-UT series SIP phones.
On your PT, you can establish one or more Message for Another Extension buttons. These
buttons can accept the message waiting notification of other extensions or various incoming
call distribution groups.
In other words, you can monitor the message waiting notifications of other telephones.
A single line telephone extension user will receive a special dial tone as message waiting
notification when going off-hook.
The message waiting lamp of a single line telephone can also let you know that you have a
message in the same way as the Message button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Message button or Message for Another Extension button.
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who is busy on the telephone and establish a three-party
conversation. After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another extension
on the display before establishing a three-party conversation.
46
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To join an intercom call
PT/SLT/PS
Party joining the call
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
(DSS)
3
OR
C.Tone
(SDN)
OR
Off-hook.
extension no.
Talk.
Enter 3.
B. Tone
Press red DSS or SDN, or dial extension number.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
To join an outside call
PT/PS
Party joining the call
(CO)
OR
B. Tone
3
C.Tone
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press red CO or SDN.
Talk.
Enter 3.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
•
•
•
SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but other extensions can call them using Executive
Busy Override.
To join another conversation, you must have Executive Busy Override enabled at your
extension through COS programming.
It is possible for an originating extension to leave a three-party conversation with an outside
party and let the two other parties talk by simply going on-hook.
For the originating extension
User Manual
47
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To talk to each party alternately
PT/PS
During a conversation
To continue
Press TRANSFER.
•
48
User Manual
Talk to the
other party.
You can also deny others the possibility of joining your conversation (Default: Allow). Refer
to "1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Deny)".
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
The preprogrammed extension can monitor another extension. After pressing a DSS button, you can check
the caller information of the call to another extension on the display. Then, you can choose to monitor the call,
if necessary.
To monitor
PT/SLT/PS
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
OR
5
(PDN)
Monitoring starts
C.Tone
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
B. Tone
Enter 5.
OR
extension no.
Press red DSS, PDN, or SDN, or dial extension number.
•
SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but they can be monitored by other extensions.
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who has set the DND feature.
PT/SLT/PS
extension no.
DND Tone
Off-hook.
•
Dial extension
number.
1
Enter 1.
R.B.Tone
Talk.
SIP phone users cannot use DND Override to call someone who has set the DND feature,
but can let other extensions call them using DND Override when the DND feature is set.
User Manual
49
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/
Voice)
The caller can alternate the alerting method, either ring or
voice, when making an intercom call.
On the other hand, any extension can set the alerting
method, either ring or voice, when receiving an intercom call.
Ringing (Default): You can call the other party with a ring
tone.
Voice-calling: You can talk to the other party immediately
after confirmation tone.
Ring
Ring
Hello
OR
To change the method
PT/SLT/PS
After dialling
C.Tone
Enter
.
•
•
•
Talk.
Voice-calling from a SIP extension is not available.
If the called party uses a SIP extension, single line telephone (SLT) or portable station (PS),
Voice-calling is not available.
This feature is not available when the called party’s telephone is in the Voice Call Deny mode.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
User Manual
51
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
–
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS
Access)
You can use your calling privileges (Class of Service) at another extension. You may override restrictions which
have been set. To use this feature, an original extension number and an extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number) are required. You can make a call by entering a verification code and verification code PIN.
To call (Walking COS)
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS
4
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
7
47.
desired
phone no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
To call with a verification code (Verification Code Entry)
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
verification code PIN
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
User Manual
47.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
52
7
verification code
Enter
.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through
DISA (Remote Setting)
You can set the following features on your telephone from another extension or through DISA.
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
• Absent Message
• Extension Dial Lock
• Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
From another extension
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
desired
feature no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Dial desired
feature number.
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Through DISA
PIN: Personal Identification Number
From Outside Telephone
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
desired
feature no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
User Manual
Enter
Dial DISA
phone number.
extension PIN
56
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial desired
feature number.
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
1.3.1 Answering Calls
1.3 Receiving Calls
1.3.1 Answering Calls
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Select one of the following methods:
· Lift the handset to receive the preferred line.
(Default: Ringing line is selected.)
· Press the SP-PHONE button.
· Press the flashing CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or DN button directly.
· Press the ANSWER button.
•
Hands-free Operation
You can receive a call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE
button. KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248 users can have a conversation in hands-free mode
by pressing the flashing CO or DN button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
•
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group), Primary Directory Number
(PDN), or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button.
User Manual
57
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
You can answer an incoming call without going off-hook as soon as the line is connected.
When an intercom call arrives, you will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing.
When an outside call arrives, you will hear the caller talking after a preprogrammed
number of rings. Hands-free Answerback for outside calls requires system
programming.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
Press
AUTO ANS.
•
•
•
58
User Manual
PT users: The AUTO ANS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not set
Red on: Set
KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670) users: When Hands-free Answerback is set,
the AUTO ANS icon appears on the display.
PS and KX-UT670 users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
–
–
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension or group from your phone without leaving
your desk.
The following types of pickup are available:
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(DSS)
OR
4
0
group no.
Group
C.Tone
OR
4
1
extension no.
Directed
Talk.
Off-hook.
Press flashing DSS.
Enter 40 and then dial group number (2 digits).
Or enter 41 and then dial extension number.
Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button
Depending on system programming, you can confirm the caller information of a call to another extension using
the DSS button before picking up the call. Pressing the corresponding DSS button will call the extension
receiving the call rather than picking up the call. While hearing the busy tone, you can check the caller
information on the display. You can pick up the call by pressing the same DSS button again.
PT/PS
(DSS)
Off-hook.
•
Press flashing DSS.
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
(DSS)
Press DSS again.
Talk.
If you receive a call waiting tone, you can ask a third party to pick up your second call with
Directed Call Pickup.
User Manual
59
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup Group Monitor)
Depending on system programming, PT users such as colleagues can view the caller information of a call to
another extension which belongs to the same call pickup group. The user can view the caller’s information on
the LCD while their PT is idle. You can pick up the call by pressing the ANSWER soft button.
To pickup a call
PT
While displaying monitoring information for a call pickup group
ANSWER
Talk.
Press ANSWER.
•
Available telephones are as follows:
– IP-PTs*1
– DPTs*1
*1
•
Except models with a single line display.
While the caller information is displayed on the LCD, going off-hook will not answer the call.
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call
Pickup Deny)
You can deny or allow other people to pick up your calls.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
0
0
Off-hook.
60
User Manual
Enter
720.
Deny
OR
Allow
Enter 1 to deny
or 0 to allow.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer
From Any Station [TAFAS])
You can be notified of incoming outside calls through an external speaker. These calls can be answered from
any extension.
Through an external speaker
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
4
Off-hook.
•
Enter
2
42.
external pager no.
C.Tone
Dial external pager
number (1 digit).
Talk.
You can also receive a paging announcement via a speaker with this operation.
User Manual
61
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are convenient for operators using headsets.
With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls.
With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation,
or complete transferring a call.
To answer
PT
ANSWER
Talk.
Press ANSWER.
To transfer a call
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
TRANSFER
RELEASE
The called
party answers.
desired
phone no.
Press TRANSFER. Press DSS or dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
To talk to a waiting caller
PT
While hearing a call waiting tone
ANSWER
Press ANSWER.
62
User Manual
Talk.
Press RELEASE.
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
To transfer an outside call to an extension with a one-touch operation
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
The called
party answers.
Press DSS.
RELEASE
Press RELEASE.
The other party is placed on hold and the
destination extension is called immediately.
To end a conversation
PT
During a conversation
RELEASE
Press RELEASE.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Answer button or a Release button.
User Manual
63
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
1.4 During a Conversation
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
–
–
–
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
•
You can transfer a held call without talking, and go on-hook even if the transferred party does
not answer the call.
If a transferred call is not answered within a specified time, it will ring at a preprogrammed
extension, if set, or at your extension again. If you are off-hook at that time, you will hear an
alarm tone. If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically
disconnected.
•
For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
– Even if your telephone has a TRANSFER button, you cannot use it to transfer calls.
Please make sure to use the HOLD button.
– The transfer operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section,
and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
– Blind Transfer
Blind Transfer may be available on your phone. For details about using Blind Transfer,
refer to the documentation for your SIP phone. (This feature is not available when
transferring to an outside party using the SIP service.)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
extension no.
Press DSS or dial
extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
User Manual
65
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SLT
During a conversation
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial
extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
*
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
HOLD
KX-UT series
only.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
•
•
•
Dial extension number.
* For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD
button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can
return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
For all types of telephone users, if the call is not transferred within a specified time, you will
hear an alarm (Transfer Recall).
For the transfer operation using an SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
PT/PS
During a conversation with an outside party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
User Manual
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
To transfer with one touch (One-touch Transfer)
66
Talk.
On-hook.
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
System programming is required to use the One-touch Transfer feature during a conversation
with an extension.
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this feature.
PT/PS
During a conversation
outside line
outside
phone no.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
Talk.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
outside line
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Seize outside line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
OR
HOLD
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
C.Tone
outside line
*
outside
phone no.
KX-UT series
only.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
User Manual
67
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
•
•
•
* For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD
button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can
return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
Time limit
Both the caller and the transferred party will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before a
specified time period, and the call will be disconnected.
To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER button,
the corresponding CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button, or the hookswitch.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation
phone no.
(ISDN-Hold)
Press ISDN-Hold.
Dial phone number.
On-hook.
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
PT/PS
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
6
Enter
2
62.
phone no.
Dial phone number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
68
User Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
6
Enter
phone no.
2
62.
Dial phone number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
•
•
•
To retrieve the held call, press the TRANSFER button, Recall/hookswitch.
Even if you go on-hook while transferring a call, it is transferred.
After the call is transferred, the line becomes idle.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an ISDN-Hold button.
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
To transfer a call with announcement (Attended Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
outside line
outside
phone no.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
Talk.
On-hook.
User Manual
69
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SIP-Extn.
During a conversation
TRANSFER
outside
phone no.
outside line
C.Tone
KX-UT series only.
Seize outside line.
Press TRANSFER.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
outside line
Seize outside line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
To transfer a call without announcement (Blind Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
70
User Manual
6
Enter
1
61.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
•
•
6
Enter
1
61.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
The availability of this feature depends on your SIP service provider.
You cannot return to the held call after dialling the destination’s number.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the Blind Transfer feature number.
User Manual
71
1.4.2 Holding a Call
1.4.2 Holding a Call
–
–
Holding
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
•
For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
The holding operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section, and
may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
Holding
There are two types of hold. The difference between them is that other people can retrieve your held call
(Regular Hold) or not (Exclusive Call Hold). As they can be alternated, ask your manager what the current
mode is.
To hold (Call Hold)
PT/PS
During a conversation
OR
5
C.Tone
0
C.Tone
On-hook.
Press HOLD, or press TRANSFER and
then enter 50.
SLT
During a conversation
5
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
0
50.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
HOLD
Press HOLD.
72
User Manual
On-hook.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
PT/SLT/PS
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(CO)
OR
OR
0
5
Off-hook.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Press flashing CO or INTERCOM,
or enter 50.
Talk.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
(CO)
OR
5
Off-hook.
3
Press CO, or enter
held line no.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Talk.
53 and then held line number (3 digits).
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
(DSS)
5
1
OR
holding
extension no.
Off-hook.
Enter
51.
Press DSS or dial
holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
User Manual
73
1.4.2 Holding a Call
SIP Extn.
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(S-CO)
OR
(DN)
OR
OR
Off-hook.
Talk.
HOLD
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press flashing S-CO or DN.
Other than KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press HOLD.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
5
Off-hook.
Enter
held line no.
3
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Dial held line number (3 digits).
53.
Talk.
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
5
Off-hook.
74
User Manual
Enter
1
51.
holding
extension no.
Dial holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
•
•
•
•
•
•
For PT users: The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
– Exclusive Call Hold mode
Flashing green moderately: Your held call
Red on: Another extension’s held call
For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The S-CO button light
shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Hold
Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
Hold Mode Change (PT only)
After pressing the HOLD button, if you press the HOLD button again, the status switches
from the Regular Hold mode to the Exclusive Call Hold mode or from the Exclusive Call Hold
mode to the Regular Hold mode.
If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button to make or
answer another call.
For the Call Hold Retrieve operation using a PDN/SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary
Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
You can put a call on hold in a common parking zone of the PBX so that any extension can retrieve the parked
call. You can use this feature as a transferring feature.
A call can be put into either a specified parking zone (Specified) or any idle parking zone (Auto). If a Call Park
button and Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button have been established, you can select either way to park
by simply pressing the corresponding button.
When a call is parked automatically, or more than one call has been parked at the same time, you need to
specify the parking zone number to retrieve the required call.
To set
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(Call Park)
Press Call Park.
User Manual
75
1.4.2 Holding a Call
PT/PS
During a conversation
parking zone no. Specified
5
2
OR
C.Tone
Auto
On-hook.
Press TRANSFER.
Enter
52.
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits) or press
to park at an idle parking zone
automatically.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number or press again.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
5
Enter
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
2
52.
parking zone no.
C.Tone
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits).
On-hook.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number.
To retrieve (Call Park Retrieve)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Call Park)
Press a flashing Call Park.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Off-hook.
76
User Manual
Enter
2
52.
stored parking
zone no.
Dial stored parking
zone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
•
•
•
•
•
•
If a call is parked automatically, confirm the parking zone number on the display.
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Call
Park Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
For SIP phone users: Any SIP phone user can retrieve a parked call, but only KX-UT133/
KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users can put a call into a parking zone.
The Call Park button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red (for PT): You or another extension has a call parked.
Flashing red (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): Another extension has a
call parked.
Flashing green (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): You have a call parked.
If you hear a reorder tone when retrieving a parked call, there is no held call. Confirm the
stored parking zone number.
After you park a call, you can perform other operations.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Park button or Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
User Manual
77
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth (alternately).
•
KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot leave the conversation and let the two remaining
parties talk.
To alternate between the parties leaving one party on hold temporarily
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
(DSS)
XFER
XFER
OR
C.Tone
extension no.
Press TRANSFER.
Talk to the
other party.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Press TRANSFER.
For KX-UT670:
Press Swap.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
extension no.
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
78
User Manual
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
extension no.
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
This step can be omitted if Automatic
Call Hold is enabled on your telephone.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Talk to the
original party.
Press the flashing DN
or S-CO.
The other party will be on hold.
To leave the conversation and then let the two parties talk
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
extension no.
Press TRANSFER.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press TRANSFER.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
On-hook.
User Manual
79
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
–
–
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset occurs
when an outside call has been received or another extension is letting you know a call is waiting. You must
activate this feature to use it. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
You can answer the second call by disconnecting (1) or holding (2) the current call.
1. To disconnect the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
While hearing a tone
On-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
Off-hook.
2. To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS
While hearing a tone
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press HOLD.
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
80
User Manual
(SDN)
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
Talk to the
new party.
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
SLT
While hearing a tone
0
5
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
Talk to the
new party.
50.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
While hearing a tone
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Talk to the new party.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While hearing a tone
(DN)
C.Tone
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Press the flashing DN,
or S-CO.
Talk to the new party.
After talking to the new party (second call), you can disconnect (2.1) or hold (2.2) it and then retrieve
the first call.
User Manual
81
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
2.1 To disconnect the second call and then talk to the original party
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
OR
Talk to the
original party.
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
original party.
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
0
5
C.Tone
On-hook.
82
User Manual
Off-hook.
Enter
50.
Talk to the
original party.
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
2.2 To hold the second call and then talk to the original party
After holding it, you can talk to the original party. Then, you can disconnect it and then talk to the new party
again.
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
(SDN)
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
User Manual
83
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
original party.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
new party.
SLT
During a conversation
0
5
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
Talk to the
original party.
50.
5
0
C.Tone
On-hook.
•
•
84
User Manual
Off-hook.
Enter
50.
Talk to the
new party.
Depending on the type of your telephone, you may be able to talk to the other party using
the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or you can receive
an announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA) if you are having a conversation
using the handset.
Refer to "1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/
Whisper OHCA)".
The caller’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in fifteen second intervals while
waiting to be answered.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
–
–
–
–
–
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Three-party Conference
[3PTY]—by ISDN)
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
You can add one or more parties to your conversation.
•
For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users:
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button for the first time to establish
a conference call, the DN/S-CO button for the call will turn off and a new DN button will light
green for the conference call. Even if you add more parties, only the newly lit DN button is lit
up for the call.
To establish a conference call
PT/PS
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
OR
C.Tone
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
Dial desired phone
number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Talk with multiple
parties.
Press CONF.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
KX-UT series
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
86
User Manual
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONFERENCE.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Talk with multiple
parties.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press TRANSFER.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press TRANSFER.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
User Manual
87
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To establish a conference call when receiving a call from an outside party during a two-party
conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press the flashing
CO, PDN, or SDN.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
C.Tone
OR
OR
(SDN)
3
OR
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the original party.
Talk to the
original party.
Press CONF, or press
TRANSFER and then enter 3.
Talk with
multiple parties.
To add four or more parties to a conference
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
To continue
desired
phone no.
Press CONF.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
88
User Manual
C.Tone
Talk.
Press CONF.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Talk.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To add another party on hold to a conference
PT/PS
During a 3- to 7-party conference
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
C.Tone
(PDN)
OR
Press CONF.
(SDN)
Press CONF.
Talk with
multiple parties.
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, or SDN corresponding to
the party on hold.
To talk to two parties alternately in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER.
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/hookswitch.
User Manual
89
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To disconnect one party and then talk to the other in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press TRANSFER once
or twice to establish a
conversation with the
party to be disconnected.
Press FLASH/RECALL.*
The other party will be put on hold.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create or edit a Conference button.
User Manual
Talk.
OR
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the party on hold.
* In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone must be set to Flash/
Recall mode through system programming.
During a three-party conversation, pressing the TRANSFER button or Recall/hookswitch
alternates between the other parties in the conversation.
You can have a conference with a maximum of eight parties (comprising intercom or outside
lines) simultaneously.
During a conversation involving four or more parties, you cannot disconnect one party and
maintain the conversation with the other parties.
Non-KX-UT series SIP phone users cannot originate a conference call, but can be added as
a member.
When a KX-UT series SIP phone user originates a conference call and one of the other parties
leaves the conference, the KX-UT series SIP phone user will still be able to talk to the
remaining party but will not be able to hold the call.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
90
(SDN)
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
The person who originated a conference can leave the conference, and allow the other
parties to continue the conversation.
•
KX-UT series SIP phone users: If you originated a conference, you cannot leave the
conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. When you go on-hook,
the conference is terminated and the other parties are disconnected.
To leave a conference
PT/PS
During 3- to 7-party conference
Press CONF.
On-hook.
To return while others are talking
PT/PS
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press flashing green CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
To complete a conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
•
Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone before a specified timeout. The originating extension user
will hear an alarm tone before timeout. The call is disconnected when the timer runs out
unless the originating extension returns to the conference.
User Manual
91
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
The person who originated a conference with two other parties can leave the conference, and allow the other
parties to continue the conversation.
To leave a conference involving at least one other extension
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
During a three-party conference
On-hook.
To leave a conference involving two outside parties
PT/PS
During a three-party conference
Press TRANSFER.
On-hook.
SLT
During a three-party conference
Press Recall/hookswitch.
•
On-hook.
To leave a conference call involving two outside parties and have the conversation continue,
your extension must be enabled to transfer calls to outside lines through COS programming.
User Manual
93
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
You can let a third party join your current outside call and establish a three-party
conversation. You can also leave the conversation and then let the two other parties
talk.
To let a third party join your conversation and establish a three-party conversation
PT/PS
Your extension (on the outside call)
Wait for an answer.
To prolong, press
the S-CO again.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press green
S-CO.
Other extension
Talk.
The S-CO button will flash
at all extensions that have
that S-CO button.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press the flashing
S-CO within 5 seconds.
•
•
Talk.
Off-hook.
Only an S-CO button can be used for this operation.
You can leave a three-party conversation and let the two other parties talk by simply going
on-hook.
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service
(Three-party Conference [3PTY]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(ISDN-Hold)
Press ISDN-Hold.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
94
User Manual
Press CONF.
Talk with multiple
parties.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
6
C.Tone
Enter
Press TRANSFER.
desired
phone no.
2
62.
Talk to the
new party.
Dial desired
phone number.
Press TRANSFER.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
3
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
6
desired
phone no.
2
C.Tone
Enter
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
62.
Dial desired
phone number.
Talk to the
new party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
3
Enter 3.
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
User Manual
95
1.4.6 Mute
1.4.6 Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the
room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation
VOICE CALL
OR
OR
MUTE
Press MUTE.
•
•
•
The AUTO ANS/MUTE or VOICE CALL/MUTE button light for PTs, or the SP-PHONE button
light for KX-UT series SIP phones shows the current status as follows:
Off: Normal
Flashing red: Mute
If mute is used during OHCA, it will become Handset Mute.
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
User Manual
97
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook
Monitor)
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while
continuing the conversation using the handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation using the handset
Press SP-PHONE.
•
•
•
•
98
User Manual
The SP-PHONE button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The voice is heard through the handset.
On: The voice is heard through the speaker and the handset.
This feature requires system programming.
Hands-free operation
You can have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE button. You can
perform other tasks simultaneously.
Helpful hints for hands-free operation:
– If it is difficult to hear the other party’s voice,
Increase the volume using the Navigator Key, Jog Dial, or Volume Key.
– If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
Decrease the volume.
– If the other party reports that your voice echoes,
Use the telephone in a room that has curtains, carpeting or both.
– If parts of the conversation cannot be heard,
If you and the other party speak at the same time, parts of your conversation may be lost.
To avoid this, try to speak alternately.
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
You can have a conversation using a headset.
In this case, you must select "Headset on" in programming mode or set the Headset button
on (red) in advance. However, for the KX-UT113/KX-UT123, Headset mode is enabled
automatically when a headset is connected to the headset jack of the telephone.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
To talk using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Press SP-PHONE.
To use the handset during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Off-hook.
To talk in hands-free mode during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Headset)
Press red Headset.
•
•
The Headset button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Headset mode off
Red on: Headset mode on
This feature is not available for the KX-T7665.
User Manual
99
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
•
For KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephone users:
– With KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephones, you can use a Bluetooth wireless headset registered on your extension as
a headset.
– Operating Distance
Please keep the telephones with connected Bluetooth Modules, 3 m or more apart from
each other. Also, if a Bluetooth headset is in use near a telephone with a connected
Bluetooth Module, other than the one it is registered to, noise may be heard. Move away
from the telephone and closer to the one it is registered to, to improve the signal.
– Noise
Signals are transmitted between this module and the Bluetooth headset using radio
waves. For maximum distance and noise free operation, it is recommended that the
module is situated away from electrical appliances such as faxes, radios, PCs, or
microwaves.
• Systems using the 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere
with this product. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN,
Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor
noise.
•
For KX-UT248 and KX-NT560 users:
– You may not be able to use all of the functionality available on a Bluetooth headset. For
example, redialling will not work with a REDIAL button on a Bluetooth headset, and,
during hands-free mode, you cannot switch the call to the Bluetooth headset through
headset operation.
•
For KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551), KX-DT543, KX-DT546, KX-UT133, KX-UT136,
KX-UT248, and KX-UT670 telephone users:
– You can use Electric Hook Switch (EHS) headsets. For the latest information about
headsets that have been tested with this unit, consult your dealer.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Headset Operation
•
100
User Manual
Select the equipment to use.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Headset button.
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
1.5 Using a PDN/SDN Button
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
buttons are useful when extension users will handle calls for other extensions. For
example, a secretary or multiple secretaries can handle calls and check the call status
of a boss or multiple bosses. The functions of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
PDN button: This button can be used to make and receive all calls (including both
outside and intercom calls). Having multiple PDN buttons allows multiple calls to be
queued at the extension. Extensions that have a PDN button are called PDN extensions.
SDN button: The light of an SDN button displays the current call status of the registered
extension, similar to a DSS button. In addition, this button can be used to perform the
following operations:
SDN Direct Dial)
• call the PDN extension (
• answer calls ringing at the PDN extension
Call Hold and Call Hold
• hold calls and retrieve calls held by the PDN extension (
Retrieve)
• transfer calls to the PDN extension (
Call Transfer Using SDN Button)
Extensions that have an SDN button are called SDN extensions.
•
•
•
•
The extension that is registered as the destination of an SDN button must have at least one
PDN button.
One extension can have up to 8 PDN buttons.
An extension can have only one SDN button for each PDN extension.
The button light of each PDN/SDN button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
The PDN extension is idle.
Green on
The extension is on a call using the PDN
button.
The extension is on a call using an SDN
button.
Flashing green
slowly
A call is on hold at the PDN extension
(Regular Hold).
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold (Regular Hold).
Flashing green
moderately
A call is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive
Call Hold.
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold temporarily or on Exclusive Call
Hold.
Flashing green
rapidly
The PDN extension is receiving an incoming
call.
An SDN extension is receiving a Hold
Recall or callback ringing from a call
answered with the SDN button.
Red on
A corresponding SDN extension is using the
line.
The corresponding PDN extension or
another corresponding SDN extension
is using the line.
Flashing red
slowly
A corresponding SDN extension is holding a
call.
Another corresponding SDN extension,
or the PDN extension itself, is holding a
call.
User Manual
101
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Light Pattern
Flashing red
rapidly
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
The PDN extension is receiving an incoming
call to an incoming call distribution (ICD)
group.
The corresponding PDN extension is
receiving an incoming call.
SDN Direct Dial
Using an SDN button, you can easily call the corresponding PDN extension. SDN buttons are in one of two
modes depending on system programming, and the operation procedure differs as follows:
Enhanced DSS Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press corresponding
SDN.
Standard SDN Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
•
•
•
102
User Manual
Press corresponding
SDN.
(SDN)
D.Tone
Press the SDN again.
Talk.
When performing SDN Direct Dial to call the corresponding PDN extension, the SDN button
light shows the current status of the destination extension as follows:
Green on: You are using the line.
Red on: The line is being used. (The PDN extension, or another SDN extension when multiple
extensions have SDN buttons to a same PDN extension, is using the line.)
Even if a PDN extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), you can call the extension as normal
by pressing the SDN button.
When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you can dial a telephone number while
hearing a dial tone, instead of pressing the SDN button again. Depending on system
programming, your call will be made using either your normal calling privileges (Class of
Service) or those of the corresponding PDN extension (SDN Walking COS).
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve
You can put calls answered with a PDN or SDN button on hold normally (®1.4.2 Holding a Call).
You can also retrieve a call held at your extension/another extension with a simple operation, regardless of
the call type.
Call Hold Retrieve
PT/PS
To retrieve a call at the holding extension
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing green
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
To retrieve a call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing red
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
•
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Hold
Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
•
If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another PDN button to make or answer another call.
User Manual
103
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Call Transfer Using SDN Button
You can transfer a call to a PDN extension with a simple operation using a corresponding SDN button.
To transfer a call to a PDN extension
PT/PS
During a conversation
*
(SDN)
Press SDN.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
•
•
System programming is required to use this feature during a conversation with an extension.
* When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you have to press the SDN button
twice to transfer the call, unless you used that SDN button to answer an incoming call.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
•
•
104
User Manual
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Primary Directory Number (PDN) or Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
button.
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
–
–
–
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a specified
destination.
All Calls:
All calls are forwarded. Preset extensions may also forward
from their own receiving group.
Busy:
All calls are forwarded when your extension is busy.
No Answer:
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer the call within
a specified time period.
Busy/No Answer (BSY/NA):
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer within a
specified time period or when your extension is busy.
Follow Me (From):
If you fail to set the above-mentioned "All Calls" to forward
before you leave your desk, you can set the same feature
from the destination extension.
•
Incoming calls can be forwarded up to four times.
User Manual
105
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
•
•
You can set the UM group’s floating extension number as a forward destination.
You can set the floating extension number of a voice mail group or the SVM feature as a
forward destination.
You can set your cellular phone as the forward destination.
Boss & Secretary feature
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension.
•
•
<Example>
Call
Forwarding
extension
Forward
set
destination
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
0
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
3
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
4
Intercom Calls
5
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
106
User Manual
Enter #.
On-hook.
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set Follow Me from another extension
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 7 or 8.
C.Tone
Dial your
extension number.
•
Follow Me
Follow Me Cancel
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
71.
your
extension no.
7
8
Outside Calls
OR
On-hook.
When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Call Forwarding by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the FWD/
DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Call
Forwarding for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone.
For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
Enter
1
713.
3
time
C.Tone
Enter time
(seconds [2 digits]).
On-hook.
User Manual
107
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD] for your Incoming Call Distribution Group)
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Both Calls
1
OR
7
1
5
Outside Calls
OR
6
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Set
OR
0
Cancel
ICD Group
extension no.
Intercom Calls
Enter 4 to 6 as
you desire.
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering ICD
Group extension number.
destination
extension no.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
•
•
•
108
User Manual
Enter #.
On-hook.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Red on: FWD mode
Flashing red slowly: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
The Group FWD button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No set
Red on: FWD mode
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
•
The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown
below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed
FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
•
Transferred outside calls are also forwarded to the destination assigned for outside calls.
•
When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (forwarding type,
forward destination), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls
and FWD/DND—Intercom calls, and/or Group FWD—Outside calls and Group
FWD—Intercom calls, because:
a. the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) and the Group FWD—Both calls button will indicate the setting for either outside
calls or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The FWD icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b. pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or
the Group FWD—Both calls button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom
calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons, or Group FWD
(Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT), you can easily switch the FWD status of another
phone. First, the extension that will allow remote forwarding operation must specify an
extension to perform remote forwarding. Then, the extension to perform remote
forwarding can assign a Group FWD button for this purpose. The forwarding status of
the target extension can be checked via the LED of the button. This feature allows users
to forward calls to themselves from another extension.
User Manual
109
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel (Remote FWD setting)
PT
On the other
extension
While on-hook
(Group FWD)
The forwarding status of the
target extension changes
accordingly.
FWD status
changed remotely
Press Group FWD.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit Group FWD (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you
can easily switch the FWD/DND status, and set the forward destination for outside/
intercom calls with the FWD/DND button (fixed button). For PT users, it is also possible
to set outside telephone numbers (e.g., your cellular phone) as forward destinations for
up to 4 Virtual PSs* in an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, to ring together with
other ICD Group members for calls to the group.
The following settings are available:
•
•
•
Switching the FWD/DND status and setting FWD destination for outside/intercom calls
Timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
Forwarding status (on/off) and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls for up to 4 virtual PSs
in an ICD Group
* Virtual PS
A virtual PS is a dedicated
extension number assigned to a
non-existent portable station
(PS) to allow access to outside
destinations such as a cellular
phone.
3 Talk
2 Forward to
outside destination
Extn. 101
•
110
User Manual
1 Dials 301
Virtual PS
(Extn. No. 301)
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To
set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To switch FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
•
Enter 2.
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
When you switch the FWD/DND status, any FWD destination that was set previously is not
cleared.
User Manual
111
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
1
Outside Calls*
OR
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Intercom Calls
Enter 1 or 2.
0
1
Press STORE.
FWD/DND off
DND on
Enter 0 or 1.
OR
2
3
4
5
FWD–All Calls
FWD–Busy
FWD–No Answer
FWD–Busy/No Answer
destination
extension no.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
Press STORE
to set.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 2 to 5.
•
112
User Manual
Enter destination extension number,
or outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
* This step can be omitted.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
: FWD/DND off
FWD/DND Off
Do Not Disturb : DND on
OR
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
FWD(All) : FWD–All Calls
FWD(BSY) : FWD–Busy
FWD(NA) : FWD–No Answer
FWD(B/NA) : FWD–Busy/No Answer
destination
extension no.
OR
outside
phone no.
outside line
access no.
#
(max. 32 digits)
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Enter destination extension number,
or outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
Press ENTER
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
time
3
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 3.
Press STORE.
*
Enter time
(seconds [0–120]).
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
•
* You can enter the time as a 1–3 digit number. For example, 15 seconds can be entered as
"15" or "015".
User Manual
113
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set forwarding status and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls to an
ICD Group
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Virtual PS 4
4
5
6
7
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 4 to 7.
Press STORE.
To cancel ringing
0
FWD off
Enter 0.
OR
To set ringing
1
FWD–All Calls
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 1.
•
•
114
User Manual
Enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
Only one extension assigned as member 1 in each ICD group can perform the settings for
virtual PSs.
It is possible to switch the forwarding status (on/off) of a virtual PS by entering the number
(4–7) of that extension, then pressing the fixed FWD/DND button, instead of pressing the
AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message
[SVM])
Your PBX can provide you with answering machine service.
Your extension is assigned a message box, into which callers can leave voice messages for you.
After callers reach your message box, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record two
kinds of personal greetings: a normal greeting message and a greeting message for each time mode. You can
also play back and clear your greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
–
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
–
–
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
–
Leaving Voice Messages
–
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
–
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
–
•
This feature is not available for SIP Extensions. Even if a caller leaves a voice messages for
a SIP Extension, the Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp will not turn on to tell
you that a voice message has been received.
You may hear a busy tone when trying to access your message box if too many other users
are already accessing their message boxes. In that case, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the used recording space (including greeting messages and voice messages left by callers)
for the SVM feature reaches a certain limit, the display informs you that the recording space
is almost full, and you will hear dial tone 3 when going off-hook.
•
•
Dial Tone 3
1s
•
Operation Reference When Accessing Your Message Box
After entering the SVM feature number ( 38), the operations below are available by entering
the corresponding numbers.
Operation No.
#
120
User Manual
Operation
0
To clear the normal greeting message
1
To record a normal greeting message
2
To play back the normal greeting message
3
To listen to voice messages left by callers
8
To set a greeting message for each time mode
6
To leave a voice message to another extension’s message box
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
To record
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
1
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
Record
message.
Enter 1.
38.
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot
take your call right now. Please leave a message."
The greeting
message is
played back.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
0
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
On-hook.
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
2
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
0
Enter 2.
38.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
The greeting message
is played back.
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
•
On-hook.
* This step can be omitted.
User Manual
121
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
3
8
0
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
On-hook.
Enter 0.
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
In addition to a normal greeting message, you can record a specific greeting message for each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night).
To record
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
1 Night
8
8
1
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
Enter 8.
Enter the desired
time mode.
The greeting message
is played back.
OR
dial key
Record
message.
C.Tone
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am
out for lunch right now. Please leave a message."
0
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
122
User Manual
Enter 1.
On-hook.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
8
3
1 Night
8
2
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 8.
38.
0
The greeting message
is played back.
Enter the desired
time mode.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
Enter 2.
*
OR
1
Rerecord
On-hook.
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
•
* This step can be omitted.
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
8
8
1 Night
2 Lunch
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 8.
38.
Enter the desired
time mode.
0
C.Tone
Enter 0.
•
On-hook.
If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have
been recorded, callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no
greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message
will be played instead.
User Manual
123
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your own message box so that callers can leave voice messages
when you cannot answer the phone.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
floating extension no.
for the SVM feature
Enter the floating extension
number for the SVM feature.
•
124
User Manual
#
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system
programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Leaving Voice Messages
If the extension user you called is not able to answer your call, and your call is redirected to the message box,
you will hear the greeting message. Then, you can leave a voice message for that extension. It is also possible
to leave a voice message directly in the message box of a desired extension by following the steps below:
To leave a voice message directly to another extension’s message box
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
You hear the
greeting message.
8
38.
#
6
Enter #6.
extension no.
Dial extension number.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
Record
message.
On-hook or press any
dial key (0–9, , #).
•
Voice message recording will stop, you will hear a notification tone, and the call will be
disconnected, in the following cases:
a. the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (default: 120
seconds)
b. the recording space for the SVM feature reaches the limit.
•
When you are on the phone, you can transfer the call directly to the message box of a desired
extension by placing the call on hold temporarily, then pressing 38 + #6 + the desired
extension number. This allows the caller to leave a voice message in the message box of the
desired extension.
User Manual
125
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
When a caller leaves a voice message, information about that caller is also recorded as the SVM Log. The
SVM Log can be viewed using the display of a PT or PS by pressing the Message button.
To listen to voice messages
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
Off-hook.
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
8
3
Enter 3.
38.
PT/SLT/PS
OR
7
Off-hook.
0
2
Press MESSAGE
or enter 702.
To clear the voice message that you are listening to
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing the voice message
3
OR
1
Enter 3.
•
126
User Manual
Press STORE or
enter 1 to confirm.
Various operations are available by entering numbers while you are listening to a recorded
voice message using any of the methods described above. The available options are as
follows:
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Operation No.
1
/
Operations
#
To play back the voice message from the beginning
2
To go to the next voice message
3
To clear the voice message
(Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button or enter 1 to confirm.)
4
To call back the caller who left the voice message
5
To go back to the previous voice message
#
6
To leave a voice message directly in the message box of another extension
(Enter desired extension number.)
If you cannot input the desired extension number within the specified time,
play back the voice message from the beginning. If you enter an incorrect
number for the desired extension number, you will hear a reorder tone.
#
8
To play back your greeting message and record a voice message in your own
message box
#
9
To end the call
The operation numbers above may be changed to other numbers. If you cannot activate these operations,
consult your system administrator.
•
•
•
•
In addition to the caller information that is recorded in the Call Log, the following SVM Log information is
recorded with voice messages left by callers:
• Caller’s Name
• Caller’s Telephone Number
• Time recording started
• Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages that have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages that have previously been listened to.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was
received and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above
information.
You can lock the SVM Log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) to prevent
other users from viewing the information and from playing back your voice messages (Display Lock). Refer
to "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
If your telephone has a Message for Another Extension button, you can access the message box of another
extension and listen to voice messages for that extension.
If a new voice message has been left in your message box, you will hear dial tone 4 after going off-hook.
In addition, if your telephone has a Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button
or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Dial Tone 4
1s
User Manual
127
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To listen to voice messages while your display is locked
PT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
extension no.
7
Dial your
extension number.
47.
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
8
3
Enter
•
38.
3
Enter 3.
When you press the Message button to play back voice messages while on-hook, Display
Lock is temporarily deactivated after you enter the extension PIN.
To clear voice messages from the SVM Log
PT
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
128
User Manual
Press TRANSFER.
Press STORE.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
You can remotely access your message box and perform any operations of the SVM feature through an outside
line as if you were at your own extension.
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
The greeting
message is
played back.
desired phone no.
Off-hook.
4
Dial desired phone
number of a destination
that has set the SVM feature.
your
extension no.
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
•
7
Enter 47 while hearing
the greeting message.
3
extension PIN
For available operations,
see "Operation Reference
When Accessing Your
Message Box".
8
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
Enter
38.
If you hear a reorder tone when you try to leave a voice message directly in the message box
of another extension, that message box is unavailable. You can enter another extension
number by pressing " ".
When accessing your message box from an outside telephone, you cannot call back callers
who have left voice messages, by pressing 4 while hearing the voice message.
•
To listen to voice messages left in the message box of another extension
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
While hearing voice messages in your message box
#
The greeting
message is
played back.
8
4
Enter
Enter #8.
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
7
desired extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
47.
3
Enter
8
38.
3
Enter 3.
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
User Manual
129
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
You can access the message box of another extension (for example, to record a greeting message for that
extension) by following the steps below:
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
desired extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
47.
3
extension PIN
8
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
130
User Manual
Enter
38.
For available operations, see
"Operation Reference When
Accessing Your Message Box".
1.7.1 Paging
1.7 Making/Answering an Announcement
1.7.1 Paging
–
–
Group Paging
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Group Paging
You can make a voice announcement to proprietary telephones or external speakers or both in the preset
group simultaneously.
To page
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
•
Enter
3
33.
paging group
no.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Announce.
Talk.
If the group which you paged is already being used for paging, you hear a busy tone.
User Manual
131
1.7.1 Paging
Paging and then Transferring a Call
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
OR
3
OR
Enter
3
paging group
no.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
33.
Press TRANSFER or Recall/hookswitch.
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Announce.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
3
OR
OR
3
paging group
no.
HOLD
Enter
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
33.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Announce.
•
132
User Manual
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
After you go on-hook, the caller can talk to the person who answers the page.
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
To answer
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
3
C.Tone
Talk.
43.
KX-UT series
dial key
Press any dial key (0–9, , #).
Talk.
To allow/deny a paging announcement (Paging Deny)
PT/KX-UT series
1
7
2
1
0
Off-hook.
•
•
•
Enter
721.
Deny
OR
Allow
Enter 1 or 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
The following are extensions that cannot receive a paging announcement:
– Portable station
– Single line telephone
– Proprietary telephone that is ringing or busy
– Proprietary telephone in Paging Deny mode
– Proprietary telephone in DND mode
– Non-KX-UT series SIP phone
System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to receive paging
announcements.
Even if the announcement is not paging your extension, you can answer it, if it is paging your
group.
User Manual
133
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
You can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (conference group), and establish a multiple
party conversation with the called parties. You can make a conference group call to both extensions and outside
lines (including analogue lines). The following two modes are available:
• Conference Mode: the called parties can join the conversation automatically. (
Conference Mode)
• Broadcast Mode: the called parties can hear the caller’s voice announcement, and then be allowed to
join the conversation by the caller. (
Broadcast Mode)
•
•
•
If you dial a conference group number that is in use for another conversation, you will hear
a busy tone and cannot establish a multiple party conversation.
If you fail to seize idle outside lines necessary for all members assigned in the conference
group, you will hear a reorder tone and cannot make a conference group call.
When making a conference group call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will
be the one you select for making calls to an outside line. Refer to "1.9.4 Displaying Your
Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])".
Conference Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the called parties can join the conversation simply by
going off-hook. The caller can end the conversation with a specific party manually.
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter #.
A multiple party
conversation
is now established.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
134
User Manual
*
conference
group no.
Talk.
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
•
•
•
•
•
•
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
A conversation can be established with a maximum of 8 parties (including the caller).
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/
KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered without going
off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot
control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
Broadcast Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the caller can call multiple parties in a conference group,
make a voice announcement, and then establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties. This
User Manual
135
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
conversation will be heard by all called parties. Called parties can listen to the announcement simply by going
off-hook. They can send a notification tone if they want to join the conversation.
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
*
conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
Announce.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/
KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered without going
off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot
control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
136
User Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To make a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To make a conversation with a party in the group’s preassigned order
PT/PS
During an announcement
Press CONF.
•
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button after pressing a DSS Key,
you will make a conversation with the party who registered after the current party on call in
the Conference Group.
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
User Manual
137
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
If the maximum number of parties who can actively participate in the conversation is set to
32 through system programming, the keys on the conference originator’s telephone (DSS,
CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, FLASH, etc.) will not function.
•
For a called extension
To send a notification tone to the caller and join a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
Called Party
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS
corresponding
to the caller.
OR
Wait for reply.
Talk.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
PT/PS
Caller
During an announcement
A notification tone
occurs, and the display
shows the called party's
information.
(DSS)
Press
corresponding
DSS.
Talk.
Introduce the called party to
the conversation.
•
A maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conference. Also, depending on
system settings, a maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conversation.
•
Push-to-Talk for PT/SLT/PS users
If the Broadcast Mode and this mode are selected through system programming, the called
PT/SLT/PS users can join the conversation by pressing any dial key (0–9, , #) during the
voice announcement.
By assigning PSs with the Hands-free Answerback feature enabled to a conference group,
the caller can create a wireless paging system. All of the called PS users, with the Hands-free
Answerback feature enabled, will hear the voice announcement. Then, any PS user can
respond by pressing any dial key, and their reply will be heard by all of the called parties.
138
User Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
Join After Time Out
Extensions or outside telephones can join the multiple party conversation that has been already started using
this feature. For example, if the conference group members fail to answer when a conference group call is
made, they can join the multiple party conversation later using this feature. They can join the conversation from
outside telephones (through DISA or TIE Line) or extensions. This feature is available for both modes:
Conference Mode and Broadcast Mode.
For security reasons, you can set a specific entry code for the conference group call. To join the conversation,
extensions/outside telephones have to enter the same entry code. Therefore, you have to inform the parties
to be added to the conversation of the entry code in advance.
For an extension originating the conversation
To make a conference group call with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
2
32.
entry code
conference
group no.
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Enter #.
Talk.
User Manual
139
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
For an extension joining the conversation
To join a conversation with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Enter
Off-hook.
conference
group no.
2
32.
Enter #.
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Talk.
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress.
When you are using an outside telephone (through DISA or TIE Line), it is possible to join
the conversation after accessing your extension using Walking COS.
Extensions/outside telephones can join the conversation using this feature only when the
conference group call has already been established between the extension originating a
conversation and at least one member.
To join a conversation that is already in progress, extensions/outside telephones must be
using an idle extension with no held calls.
If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants, this feature cannot be
used to join the conversation.
Starting a Conference Group Call using Hands-free Answerback
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled with at least one conference group member,
the call can be automatically answered and the conversation begins with only one participant
(the caller). Then, up to 6 participants can use the Join After Time Out feature to join the
conversation.
140
User Manual
1.8.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.8.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
Introduction to the Unified Messaging system
Your PBX can provide you with Unified Messaging system service. You or an outside party can access the
Unified Messaging system from a telephone. As the owner of a mailbox, you can:
• Send a message to one or more people inside or outside your office.
• Transfer messages to other subscribers and add your own comments.
• Access your mailbox and listen to your messages, even when out of the office.
• Have the Unified Messaging system call or e-mail you when someone leaves you a message.
• Be notified by the message waiting lamp on your extension when new messages have been recorded in
your mailbox.
• Screen your calls.
• Create a set of options and functions exclusive to your mailbox (Personal Custom Service) that can be
selected by your callers.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed in a single inbox using the Communication Assistant plug-in
for Microsoft® Outlook®.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed via an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
• Many other useful messaging features.
•
•
PBX users who are assigned a mailbox in the Unified Messaging system are called
subscribers.
Hospitality Mode:
If your service mode is set to "Hospitality Mode", available features such as listening to
messages, personal greetings, etc. may be limited according to the COS settings for your
mailbox.
Before You Begin
In order to use the Unified Messaging system as a subscriber, you need to know the following information. The
System Manager can help you if you do not know this information.
• The extension number that you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system.
• Your mailbox number and extension number (In many cases these are the same number, but it is possible
they are not).
• Your mailbox password (if set).
• The System Manager’s telephone number. The System Manager is the person you should refer to when
you have any problems with the Unified Messaging system.
Prompts
Prompts are recorded voice guidance messages that help you set and use Unified Messaging system features.
Prompts also help callers when the system is handing their calls. Depending on how your Unified Messaging
system is programmed, subscribers and callers can select the language they prefer for system prompts.
<Prompt example>
"To leave a message, press 1."
"Please leave a message at the tone."
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features."
•
•
•
Not all prompts are described in each operation.
The prompts in each operation are not exactly the same as the actual prompts you will hear
from the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the instructions provided by the voice guidance.
User Manual
141
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Logging in to Your Mailbox
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
Changing Your Password
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time
The first time you log in to your mailbox, there are certain mailbox settings you should perform before using
any other Subscriber Services. These settings identify you as the owner of your mailbox, and are described in
"
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
• Password
• Subscriber’s Name
• Personal Greeting Messages
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to initiate a "Subscriber Tutorial" the first time you log in
to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through
the mailbox configuration process.
Logging in to Your Mailbox
In order to access Subscriber Services (to play messages, change mailbox settings, etc.), you must first log
in to your mailbox. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox:
Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary when logging in to your mailbox using someone else’s extension, or when
Automatic Log-in is not enabled for your mailbox.
Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox from your own extension, you do not need to enter any special commands or
your mailbox number.
•
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For
more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
•
Mailbox Capacity Warning
When your mailbox is almost full, you will receive a Mailbox Capacity Warning shortly after
logging in to your mailbox. When you hear a Mailbox Capacity Warning, you should delete
unnecessary messages to make more recording time in your mailbox available. The amount
of recording time that remains when you hear the Mailbox Capacity Warning depends on how
your mailbox is configured. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or
System Manager for your mailbox.
For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
•
142
User Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
6
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
Enter #6.
OR
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
your mailbox no.
Enter
and your mailbox number.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
User Manual
143
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
•
•
When following audible prompts only: if Autoplay New Messages is enabled for your mailbox,
new messages will be played back automatically each time you log in to your mailbox.
Whether or not new messages will be played back one after the other automatically depends
on system programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
If Message Waiting Lamp is enabled for your mailbox, the message lamp on your telephone
will light when you receive a new message. You can log in to your mailbox and play back a
new message automatically simply by going off-hook and pressing the Message button on
your telephone. The Unified Messaging system will play back the first new message only. To
play back other messages, press the appropriate button.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and Class of Service (COS) settings of your mailbox.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to present a "Subscriber Tutorial" to you the first time
you log in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide
you through the mailbox configuration process. Simply by following the prompts, you can configure the following
items. You can configure these items later manually if necessary, as explained later in this section. This feature
may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
•
•
You may be asked to enter your password after logging in to your mailbox. If you do not know
this password, ask your System Administrator.
The subscriber tutorial may be simplified or not available depending on your COS settings.
Password:
If your mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox.
Your password can contain up to 16 digits.
Subscriber’s Name:
This is a recording of your name. Other subscribers will hear your name when they listen to messages you left
for them. It may also be heard by callers when they use the Dialling by Name feature.
Personal Greetings:
The following Personal Greeting Messages can be recorded in the subscriber tutorial. After the greeting is
played, a tone will sound, and the caller can leave a message.
• No Answer Greeting: Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting: Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’m on another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting: Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common
example might be, "This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
•
144
User Manual
If you do not record a greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To start the Subscriber Tutorial
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
The Unified Messaging system will announce,
"Welcome to the Panasonic Unified Messaging
System. This is the Subscriber Tutorial service.".
Log in to your mailbox.
To set your password for the first time
your password
#
2
Enter your password and #.
Enter 2 to accept.
OR
To change your password
your new password
1
Enter 1.
#
Enter your new password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To record the Owner’s Name
(Your Subscriber Name)
1
2
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
C.Tone
State your name.
To record your greeting messages
1
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Record the
message again
4
Add
Delete and exit
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings
1
Enter 1.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
User Manual
145
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
After callers reach your mailbox, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record 6 kinds of
Personal Greetings; the appropriate greeting will be played for callers. If you delete or do not record a greeting
message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
• No Answer Greeting:
Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be, "This is (name). I
can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting:
Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’m on
another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting:
Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common example might be, "This
is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• Personal Greeting for Caller ID:
Personal Greetings
Heard by callers from preprogrammed telephone numbers. For details, refer to "
for Caller ID".
• Temporary Greeting:
A special greeting that, if recorded, is heard by callers instead of the other greetings. A common example
might be, "This is (name). I’m out of the office this week…".
• Absent Message:
Heard by callers when a personal greeting is set to a PBX’s absent message, and that absent message is
currently set.
146
User Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To record or delete your Personal Greeting Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Enter 41.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message
Greeting
caller ID greeting no.
OR
absent message no.
Select the desired greeting. When you select "Caller ID Greeting",
enter a Caller ID Greeting Number (1–4). When you select "Absent
Message Greeting", enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
For Caller ID Greeting, refer to
"Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
1
Change the greeting
OR
C.Tone
3
Delete the selected
greeting
Record your greeting message.*
Follow the prompts as necessary.
The greeting will be deleted;
go on-hook to finish.
1
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Rerecord the greeting message (repeat the steps above as necessary)
4
Add to the greeting message you just recorded
Delete the greeting message and exit
Follow the prompts as necessary.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message Greeting
If you go on-hook without accepting your new greeting,
it will not be saved.
On-hook.
Record or delete other greeting
messages as necessary by following
the prompts, or go on-hook.
•
The contents of the Absent Message Greeting prompt and the absent message displayed on
telephones (refer to "1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent
Message)") should be programmed to match through system programming.
User Manual
147
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
•
•
* We recommend stating your name in your greeting messages, so that callers will know they
have reached the correct mailbox.
A Temporary Personal Greeting is played instead of all your other greetings until it is deleted.
Each time you log in to your mailbox, the Unified Messaging system will ask you if you want
to turn off (delete) your Temporary Personal Greeting.
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access Record No Answer
Greeting, Record Busy Greeting, Record After Hours Greeting and Record Temporary
Greeting features directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from
your extension. Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to
"Automatic log-in"). For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult
your System Administrator.
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
You can record personalised greetings for specific callers. If you have assigned their telephone numbers (Caller
ID numbers) to a personalised greeting, they will hear the appropriate greeting when they call you, instead of
your other greeting messages normally played for callers.
You can record 4 personalised greetings and assign 8 callers to each greeting. Record your personalised
greetings before assigning Caller ID numbers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To record a personalised greeting for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
personalised greeting no.
4
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
STEP A
2
1
On-hook.
C.Tone
OR
Record your greeting
message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
To assign Caller ID Numbers to
the personalised greeting,
go to STEP B in "To assign
Caller ID numbers for the first time".
To change a personalised greeting
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Enter 414.
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
1
Change the greeting,
then go to STEP A in "To record a personalised
greeting for the first time".
3
Delete the greeting.
OR
On-hook.
148
personalised greeting no.
4
User Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
2
personalised greeting no.
4
Enter the personalised
greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
*
2
#
caller ID no.
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number,
20 digits max.) and #.
•
1
Add another caller ID number.
2
End
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
* While entering a Caller ID number, you can press to enter a "wild card". This allows
several telephone numbers to match the Caller ID number that you assigned. For example,
if you store the Caller ID number as "012 … " (enter the number of s as required for
telephone numbers in your area), any telephone number that begins with "012" (for example,
all callers from the "012" area code) will hear your personalised greeting.
To add/delete/review Caller ID numbers later
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
4
Enter 414.
1
Enter the personalised
greeting number (1–4).
Add a Caller ID number,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller
ID numbers for the first time".
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Delete one number.OR
3
OR
Delete a Caller ID number.
OR
Review all assigned Caller ID numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 2
to accept.
1
OR
2
2
personalised greeting no.
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter the desired option.
1
Delete the announced number.
2
Keep the number and announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Changing Your Password
You can protect your mailbox by setting a password, to prevent unauthorised access to your mailbox. If your
mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox. Your
password can contain up to 16 digits. You can change your password at any time. When choosing a password,
avoid using obvious number combinations. If you forget your password, have your System Administrator or
System Manager clear your password. You may then set a new one.
User Manual
149
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To change your password
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
2
your desired password
1
Enter 421.
#
Enter the desired password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
You can record your name in the Unified Messaging system. The system can then announce your name for
callers to let them know that they have reached the correct mailbox.
To change/delete your subscriber name
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
3
1
1
C.Tone
Enter 431.
State your name.
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 433 to delete your subscriber name,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Commands for Changing the Current Unified Messaging System Service
After going off-hook and pressing the MESSAGE button*1, Voice Mail Transfer button, or enter the UM
group’s floating extension number, you can enter a service command to access certain Unified Messaging
system features quickly. While guidance is being provided, you can also use service commands to, for example,
switch to a different Unified Messaging system service mode.
*1
150
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
User Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
#
1
Dialling by Name
#
2
Custom Service
You will be guided to enter a Custom Service number (1–200).
#
5
Log in*1
#
6
Voice Mail Service
You can record a message for another subscriber by entering his or her mailbox
number when guided. You can also log in to your mailbox by entering this command
followed by and your mailbox number.
#
7
Restart (Return to Main Menu)*2
#
8
Automated Attendant Service
#
9
Exit
Return to Previous Menu
Help
0
#
#
Switch Service mode
If you are authorised to access a System Manager and/or Message Manager
mailbox by the System Administrator, you can switch between those services as
follows:
Subscriber service
*1
*2
Message Manager service
System Manager service
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will be prompted to enter the desired mailbox number.
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will return to the Subscriber Service Main Menu.
•
•
Commands #5 and #7 are available only after you have accessed Subscriber Service.
Some commands may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
When Using Voice Prompts
The following commands can be used to help you navigate through Unified Messaging system menus.
Takes you back to the previous menu.
Repeats the current menu.
0
#
7
Takes you back to the Main Menu.
User Manual
151
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
–
–
–
–
–
Playing Messages
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
Recovering Deleted Messages
Replying to Messages
Transferring Messages
Remote Access
Playing Messages
Callers and other subscribers can leave voice messages for you, and you can play them back later after you
have logged in to your mailbox.
Messages in your mailbox are divided into 3 types:
• New Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have not played back yet.
• Old Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have played back but have not yet deleted.
• Deleted Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have deleted. You can "recover" your deleted messages, after which
they will be treated as old messages (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages"). If you do not recover
deleted messages, they will be permanently deleted at the end of the day.
When playing back a message, the Unified Messaging system can also announce the message’s
"envelope"—the date and time of the message, and the message sender’s information.
To play messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
3
9
1
New
messages
Old
messages
Deleted
messages
Enter 1, 3 or 91.
•
*
1
Voice messages
#
All messages
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
Listen to the message.
Pressing during message playback
will return you to the previous menu.
You can then select another
message type to listen to.
* This step is omitted depending on settings and COS settings of your mailbox.
Additional features are available during/after the playback of voice messages. Refer to the table below and
press the appropriate dialling key. The message types that can be used with each key a marked with a ü. Note
that certain features are not available depending on the message type (new, old, deleted).
Message Type
Key
1
152
User Manual
Feature
Repeat this message
New
Old
Deleted
ü
ü
ü
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Message Type
Key
New
Old
Deleted
Replay the previous message
ü
ü
ü
2
Play the next message
ü
ü
ü
3
Delete this message
• If a confirmation message is played, press 1
to delete the message.
ü
ü
1
(+
1
*1
1
)
3
Recover this message
4
Reply to this message
ü
ü
5
Transfer this message
ü
ü
Play the message envelope
ü
ü
ü
7
<During playback only>
Rewind the voice message
ü
ü
ü
8
<During playback only>
Pause/restart message playback
ü
ü
ü
ü
6
*1
Feature
*1
ü
8
4
<During playback only>
Increase playback volume
ü
ü
8
5
<During voice message playback only>
Set a Bookmark for the voice message
• To restart message playback, press 8.
ü
ü
8
6
<For voice messages only>
Start playback at the Bookmark for the voice
message
ü
ü
9
<During playback only>
Fast-forward
ü
ü
#
Save this message as new
• After saving the message, the next message
will be played.
ü
ü
These keys only available when the appropriate COS settings are assigned to your mailbox. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
User Manual
153
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
•
•
•
For voice messages, Unified Messaging system programming determines if the message
envelope is played before each message, after each message, or only when you press 6.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
The Unified Messaging system will automatically delete both new and old messages after a
specified number of days have passed. Your System Administrator or System Manager
controls how many days messages are retained for. Each time you play a new or old
message, the message retention counter resets.
During playback, you can increase the playback volume by pressing 84. If volume is at the
highest setting, pressing 84 will select the lowest setting, as shown below.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
(default)
Level 4
Level 5
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
While listening to a message in your mailbox, you can set a bookmark. A bookmark lets you easily resume
playback from a specific point in a specific message later. You can set one bookmark for each message in
your mailbox; if you set a new bookmark, the old one is deleted.
•
You cannot set or use bookmarks for deleted messages.
To set the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During message playback
8
5
Enter 85.
To start playback at the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after message playback
8
6
Enter 86.
Recovering Deleted Messages
You can delete voice messages in your mailbox. Once a message has been deleted, it is retained until the end
of the day, then it will be permanently deleted. Deleted messages can be "recovered", after which they will be
treated as old messages.
154
User Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To recover a Deleted Message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
3
Enter 3.
Replying to Messages
You can reply to messages left in your mailbox by either calling back the caller or by leaving a message in the
caller’s mailbox.
Calling back is possible when the person who left you the message is another subscriber. Calling back outside
callers is possible if their Caller ID information is received by the system, however, this feature may be disabled
by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
Replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox is possible only if the caller is another subscriber (i.e.,
the person must have his or her own mailbox). When replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox,
you can set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification (receipt message) once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your reply immediately or set a message delivery time. However, please note that you
cannot reply to receipt messages.
•
Only new and old messages can be replied to. To reply to a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To call back the message sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
Enter 4.
1
Enter 1 to call the sender.
User Manual
155
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To leave a message for the sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
2
Enter 4.
1
C.Tone
Enter 2
to begin recording.
Record your message.
Enter 1
to end recording.
You can pause and resume recording
by pressing 2. If you pause for
more than 20 seconds, recording
will stop automatically.
2
1
1
1
2
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook.
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
AM
1
2
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
1
*2
OR
PM
desired day of the month
for delivery
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
Make the message urgent
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
2
Enter 1 or 2.
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
Enter 2
to accept.
OR
Continue
1
3
# *
Enter 1 or 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
•
•
•
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the Unified Messaging system is programmed to use
24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are treated like regular messages: messages are played starting with the oldest.
Transferring Messages
You can transfer (forward) messages in your mailbox to other subscribers. However, please note that you
cannot transfer receipt messages, or messages that were specified by the sender as "private".
When transferring a message, you can:
• Specify the recipient by entering another subscriber’s mailbox number.
156
User Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
•
•
Specify several recipients by entering a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
Group Distribution Lists") or a Mailbox Group number.
Record your own comments and send them along with the transferred message.
•
•
Personal
No acknowledgement will be given to indicate the message has been transferred.
Only new and old messages can be transferred. To transfer a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To specify the recipients by number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
mailbox no.
5
personal group
distribution list no.
Enter 5.
1
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
2
Record comments
2
OR
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
#
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
mailbox group no.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To record your comments
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Record your comments.
On-hook.
To specify the recipients by name (dialling by name)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
1
5
#
1
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter #1.
Enter 5.
1
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
OR
2
Record comments
Enter 1 or 2.
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
To record your comments
C.Tone
Record your comments.
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
User Manual
157
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote Access
You can call the Unified Messaging system while outside and log in to your mailbox in order to listen to your
messages. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox remotely:
• Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox remotely from a preprogrammed outside telephone number (assigned as
a Caller ID number), you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number. The Unified
Messaging system can recognise the telephone number you are calling from and therefore determine you
are the caller (refer to "
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll
Saver"). This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
• Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary if logging in to your mailbox, when your mailbox is not programmed for
Automatic Log-in, or when you are calling from a telephone number not programmed for Automatic Log-in.
•
Ask your System Administrator what telephone number you should dial in order to access
the Unified Messaging system remotely.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
your password
#
Enter your password and #.
1
Enter 1 to play back
messages.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
#
8
#
8
Call an extension
OR
0
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
•
158
User Manual
#
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
The number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your call can
indicate whether or not you have new messages (Toll Saver feature). For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote manual log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified
Messaging system from
an outside telephone.
your password
your mailbox no.
6
#
Enter and your
mailbox number.
Enter #6.
#
Enter your password and #.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
Call an extension
#
8
#
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
1
OR
Enter 1 to play back
new messages.
8
0
#
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
User Manual
159
1.8.4 Sending Messages
1.8.4 Sending Messages
–
–
–
–
–
Message Delivery
Personal Group Distribution Lists
External Message Delivery
External Message Delivery Lists
Receiving External Delivery Messages
You can record messages and send them to other subscribers, to extension users who do not have mailboxes,
and even to outside parties. Messages can be sent using one of the following features:
• Message Delivery:
Sending a message to other subscribers (refer to "
Message Delivery").
• External Message Delivery:
Sending a message to parties that do not have Unified Messaging system mailboxes (extension users and
outside parties) (refer to "
External Message Delivery").
There are several ways to determine the recipients of your messages. You can specify recipients by:
• Mailbox number or subscriber name (specifies an individual recipient for Message Delivery).
• Personal Group Distribution List number or Mailbox Group number (specifies a group of recipients for
Message Delivery).
• Extension number or telephone number (specifies an individual recipient for External Message Delivery).
• External Message Delivery List number (specifies a group of recipients for External Message Delivery).
Message Delivery
You can send messages to other subscribers. You can specify message recipients either by number or by
subscriber name.
To specify the recipients by number:
• Enter the subscriber’s mailbox number.
• Enter a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
Personal Group Distribution Lists").
• Enter a Mailbox Group number (these must be created by the System Administrator. For more information,
consult your System Administrator).
To specify the recipients by name:
• Enter the first few letters of the subscriber’s name (Dialling by Name feature).
Once you have specified the recipients, you can record a message. Before sending your message, you can
set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your message immediately or set a message delivery time.
160
User Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send a message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Go to "To specify recipients by number"
or "To specify recipients by name
(dialling by name)".
2
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter 2.
To specify recipients by number
mailbox no.
OR
personal group
distribution list no.
OR
mailbox group no.
Go to
"To record your message".
2
#
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To specify recipients by name (dialling by name)
1
#
1
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter #1.
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Go to
"To record your message".
Continued on next page
User Manual
161
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To record your message
1
1
Enter 1 to record
your message.
C.Tone
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
Press 2 to add another recipient,
then go to "To specify recipients by
number" or "To specify recipients by
name (dialling by name)". A maximum of 100
recipients can be specified.
Or, press 3 to review the recipients.
2
1
1
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Record your message.
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook
2
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
Enter 2
to accept.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
1
Make the message urgent
AM
1
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
1
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
•
•
•
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
Make the message private
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
OR
2
3
# *
desired day of
the month for delivery
PM
2
OR
2
*2
OR
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are played with other messages, in the original order.
Personal Group Distribution Lists
Personal Group Distribution Lists allow you to send messages to several subscribers at once (refer to "
Message Delivery"). You can create and edit 4 Personal Group Distribution Lists, and these lists can only be
used by you. You can assign 40 group members (subscribers) to each list and record a name for each group
(for example, "Sales Team", "Department Heads", etc.).
162
User Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create and edit personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter 44.
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
2
2
1
1
C.Tone
Enter 1 to record
a name for the group.
State the group name.
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 2 to add
group members.
To continue
mailbox no. of
the subscriber
2
Add more subscribers
to the list
2
End
OR
Enter 2 to add
the subscriber
to the list.
Enter the mailbox number of
the subscriber you wish
to add to the list.
1
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
To delete members from personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 44.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook to finish
OR
2
Delete one member
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
3
Enter 3 to delete
a group member.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter 1 or 2.
Repeat this step to delete other members.
User Manual
163
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To change personal group distribution list names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
4
Enter 44.
1
Change (record)
the list name
3
Delete the list name,
then go on-hook to finish
desired personal group
distribution list no.
1
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
Enter 1 to change
the list name.
OR
Enter 1 or 3.
•
1
C.Tone
State the list name.
Enter 1
to end recording.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
The System Administrator can create "Mailbox Groups", which are similar to personal group
distribution lists except they can be used by other subscribers. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
External Message Delivery
You can send messages to outside parties and to extension users who do not have their own mailboxes. After
you record your message, the system will dial the appropriate telephone numbers and/or extension numbers,
and once the party on the other end answers the call, your recorded message will be played back. You can
specify message recipients by:
• Extension number
• Outside telephone number
External Message Delivery Lists")
• External Message Delivery List number (refer to "
Unlike recipients who have their own mailboxes, you have no way of knowing who may answer the call when
the Unified Messaging system sends an External Delivery Message. To protect the privacy of your messages,
you may assign a password that must be entered by the other party before your message is played back.
You can set Auto Receipt so that you will receive notification once the recipient has played back your message.
You can also send your message immediately or set a message delivery time. Finally, recipients of an External
Delivery Message can reply to your message, and can even set urgent and private message status.
•
164
User Manual
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System
Manager.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send an external delivery message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
Go to "To specify a single recipient"
or "To specify multiple recipients
(external message delivery list)".
Enter 931.
To specify a single recipient
*
1
outside line access no.
Outside party’s
telephone no.
Enter 1.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To specify an extension instead of
an outside telephone number,
enter the extension number,
then skip the next step.
4-digit password
2
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Enter a 4-digit password
State the recipient’s name.
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
1
#
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter # for immediate delivery.
Go to
"To record your message".
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
Continued on next page
•
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
User Manual
165
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To specify multiple recipients (external message delivery list)
desired list no.
2
4-digit password
Enter the desired list number (1 or 2).
Enter 2.
Enter a 4-digit password
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
Go to
"To record your message".
#
Enter # for immediate delivery.
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
To set message delivery time
1
# *
desired delivery time
1
2
Enter the desired delivery time and #.
desired day of the month
for delivery
AM
*2
OR
PM
Enter 1 for AM, 2 for PM.
#
*3
Go to
"To record your message".
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
To record your message
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Enter 1
to end recording.
166
User Manual
C.Tone
Enter 2
to accept.
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Record your message.
On-hook.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
If you set a password required for listening to the message, make sure you notify each
recipient what the password is.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
External Message Delivery Lists
Your external message delivery lists allow you to send messages to several outside parties and extension
users who do not have their own mailboxes at once (refer to "
External Message Delivery"). You can create
and edit 2 External Message Delivery Lists, and these lists can only be used by you. You can assign up to 8
members to each list and record a name for each member.
•
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
User Manual
167
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create/add to an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
Log in to your mailbox.
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
OR
2
Enter 932.
1
Enter 1 or 2.
outside
telephone no.
outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 1.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To store an extension number, simply
enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
1
2
C.Tone
State the member’s
name.
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2 to add
the member.
To continue
1
Add more members
2
End
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
•
On-hook.
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
To delete members from an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
2
OR
Enter 932.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook
OR
2
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
User Manual
Enter 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
Repeat this step to delete
other members.
168
2
On-hook.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
Receiving External Delivery Messages
When you send an external delivery message, the Unified Messaging system will call each of the specified
recipients. When a recipient answers the call, the system will guide him or her through the following procedure.
After a recipient has listened to an external delivery message, he or she can send you a reply to your message,
and even set urgent or private message status.
To receive a message and reply
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
When a recipient answers the call
1
#
4-digit password
Enter 1 to receive
the message.
The message is played back.
Enter a 4-digit password and #
required for listening to the message.
If you did not set a password,
this step will be skipped.
1
2
2
C.Tone
Enter 2 to reply.
Record a reply.
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
To end the call, press ,
then go on-hook to finish.
1
Make the message urgent
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
2
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
If the recipient enters an incorrect password 3 times, the system will announce the following
information if it has been programmed. This information can help the recipient track down the
message or message sender (you).
– Company name
– Callback telephone number
– Your subscriber name
The Unified Messaging system may be able to guide recipients using a different language.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
User Manual
169
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
–
–
–
–
–
–
Call Transfer
Incomplete Call Handling
Assigning Your Covering Extension
Remote Call Forwarding
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line
Voice Mail Transfer
Call Transfer
When a call reaches your extension via the Automated Attendant service, normally your extension will ring and
you can answer the call. If you use the Call Transfer feature, however, the Unified Messaging system can
handle the call in a number of ways. The status you set for Call Transfer determines what happens to the call.
You can set one of the following:
Call Blocking:
Incomplete Call Handling"),
The call will be handled by the Incomplete Call Handling feature (refer to "
which allows you to have your calls ring at another extension, transferred to your mailbox, transferred to the
operator, etc. The call will not ring at your extension. The call will be handled according to the settings you
have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Call Screening:
The system will prompt the caller to record his or her name. If you are available to answer calls, the system
will ring your extension and play back the name of the caller. You can then answer the call if you choose. If
you do not or cannot answer the call, the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Intercom Paging:
The Unified Messaging system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. The call will not ring at your
extension. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call. If you do not or cannot answer the call, the
call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you. The call will
not ring at your extension.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the custom service you specify here. The call will not ring at your extension.
Disable Call Transfer:
Turns the Call Transfer feature off. The call will ring at your extension.
170
User Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To set call transfer status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
5
2
3
1
4
5
6
Enter 51.
Call Blocking
Call Screening
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Mailbox
Transfer to Custom Service
Disable Call Transfer
Enter the desired Call Transfer status.
Follow the prompts as necessary.
On-hook.
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
•
If Call Screening or Disable is selected, calls will be transferred to an outside telephone if a
telephone number has been programmed for call transfer to outside line (refer to "
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line").
Incomplete Call Handling
When a call is directed to your extension via the Automated Attendant service, Incomplete Call Handling will
handle the calls if:
• You do not answer the call (These calls are considered "no answer" calls).
• You are on another call (These calls are considered "busy" calls).
Call Transfer").
• You have set Call Blocking (refer to "
The status you set for Incomplete Call Handling determines what happens to these calls. You can set one or
more of the following for no answer calls and for busy calls separately. If you select more than one option, the
caller will be prompted to select his or her desired option.
Leaving a Message:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you.
Transfer to Covering Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to your Covering Extension (refer to "
Assigning Your Covering
Extension"). If you have not assigned your Covering Extension, this option is not available.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the
call.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator.
User Manual
171
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Return to Top Menu:
The caller is returned to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and can then choose to call a different
extension.
To set Incomplete Call Handling status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
No answer calls
5
Busy calls
5
OR
2
3
4
Enter 4 or 5.
Enter 5.
1
5
6
Leaving a Message
Transfer to Covering Extension
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Custom Service
Transfer to Operator
Return to Top Menu
Enter the desired Incomplete Call
Handling status.
To continue
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
1
OR
2
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
•
Change
Accept
Enter 1 or 2.
Select an additional status.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
When Call Blocking is enabled, blocked calls are treated by Incomplete Call Handling for no
answer calls.
Assigning Your Covering Extension
A Covering Extension is an extension that receives your calls instead of you. Your calls can be transferred to
your Covering Extension in 2 ways:
• By the Incomplete Call Handling Feature:
When the Incomplete Call Handling feature handles the call (i.e., if you do not answer, if you are on another
call, or if you have set Call Blocking), it will be transferred to your Covering Extension if you have set
Incomplete Call Handling to "Transfer to Covering Extension" (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling").
• By pressing the specified dialling key (0, 3–9):
If the caller presses the key assigned for "Transfer to the Specified Extension" during your greeting
message or while recording a message for you, the call will be transferred to your Covering Extension.
•
•
172
User Manual
You can change the dialling key that transfers your callers to your Covering Extension. If you
assign the "Transfer to Operator" option in your Personal Custom Service to a dialling key,
callers who press that dialling key will be transferred to your Covering Extension (refer to
"
Personal Custom Service").
If you do not assign your Covering Extension, callers will be transferred to the operator
instead.
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign your Covering Extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
desired extension no.
2
Enter the desired extension number.
Enter 52.
If you have already assigned your Covering Extension and want to assign
a different extension, press 1 before entering the desired extension number.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
•
On-hook.
Once you assign a Covering Extension, remember to tell callers in your greeting message
that they can press the button you have assigned for transferring to your Covering Extension.
For example, "To speak with my assistant, press 0".
Remote Call Forwarding
You can programme the Unified Messaging system to forward your calls to another extension or to an outside
telephone (if authorised). You can do this even when you are away from the office. This feature may be disabled
by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are already on another call.
FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you do not answer your telephone.
FWD Busy and No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are on another call or do not answer
your telephone.
FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to the specified outside telephone number if you are authorised to use this feature.
FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
User Manual
173
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
8
OR
Enter 48.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 after selecting
telephone number 1 or 2.
outside party’s
telephone no.
outside line access no.
2
Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside party’s telephone
needed for making outside calls.
number (max. 32 digits including
outside line access number).
•
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Before you can forward your calls to an outside telephone, you should first store the telephone
numbers you plan on using with this feature. You can store 2 telephone numbers for use with
Remote Call Forwarding.
If you change one of the outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding, you will
need to set Remote Call Forwarding to "FWD to Outside" once again before the new outside
telephone number will be used as the forward destination. If you do not do this, the old
telephone number will continue to be used.
•
To set/cancel Remote Call Forwarding
From Outside Telephone
9
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 94.
extension no. of
the transfer destination
1
FWD All
2
FWD Busy
3
FWD No Answer
4
FWD Busy or No Answer
Enter the extension number
of the transfer destination,
then go to STEP B.
OR
5
FWD to Outside, then go to STEP A.*
6
Cancel call forwarding, then go to STEP B.
Enter required number.
STEP A
1
Set telephone number 1
2
Set telephone number 2
OR
3
outside line
access no.
Set another
telephone number
Enter required number.
Enter the outside line access
number needed for making
outside calls.
STEP B
2
Enter 2
to accept.
174
User Manual
On-hook.
outside party’s
telephone no.
Dial the outside party’s telephone
number (max. 32 digits including
outside line access number).
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
•
* This option is announced only if you are authorised to use it through system programming
for PBX COS (Class of Service) settings and UM COS settings. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to
Outside Line
When you assign a telephone number for Call Transfer to Outside Line, your calls will be transferred to the
assigned telephone number when:
• You have set Call Screening (refer to "
Call Transfer").
Call Transfer").
• You have set Disable Call Transfer (refer to "
To assign telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
outside line access no.
6
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 56.
If you have already stored a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 before continuing.
outside party's
telephone no.
2
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(max. 32 digits including outside line access number).
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
To cancel telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
6
Enter 563.
•
•
3
On-hook.
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Voice Mail Transfer
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
User Manual
175
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox
of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you
can also perform operations with one touch (for PT and PS only).
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
3
4
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
71.
0
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
#
Enter UM group’s floating
extension number.
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
176
User Manual
OR
desired
extension no.
Press DSS or dial desired
extension number.
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
extension no.
OR
R.B.Tone
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
•
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
OR
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
*Indication tone after going off-hook
1s
•
If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
User Manual
177
1.8.6 Other Features
1.8.6 Other Features
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Interview Mailbox
Message Waiting Notification
Personal Caller Name Announcement
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Recording Your Conversation
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Personal Custom Service
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
Setting Absent Message Remotely
Call-through Service
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
IMAP
Interview Mailbox
An interview mailbox is a mailbox designed to ask questions to callers and record their answers. If you have
an interview mailbox (not all subscribers do), you can record up to 10 questions and set the answer recording
time individually for each question from 1 to 60 seconds.
Your interview mailbox can be used, for example, to allow callers to place orders or request information from
your company. You can ask them to record their names, address, and order or request information, and then
you can note their information later while playing back their messages.
•
If you would like to use this feature, you must first be assigned an Interview Mailbox. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
To record questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
2
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
1
3
4
Enter 921.
Change (record or re-record) this question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
Change another question.
C.Tone
Record the question.
178
User Manual
1
2
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
Enter 1
Enter 2
to end recording. to accept.
On-hook.
1.8.6 Other Features
To change answer lengths
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Change the answer length.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
3 Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
4 Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
1
2
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
2
Enter 922.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
Change the answer length of another question.
answer length
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
Enter the answer length
(1–60) in seconds.
On-hook.
To delete questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
3
Enter 923.
1
2
3
4
Delete the current question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
If finished, go on-hook.
Message Reception Mode
If you have an interview mailbox in addition to your regular mailbox, Message Reception Mode determines
which mailbox is used when:
• Calls are directed to your mailbox by the "Leaving a Message" setting of the Incomplete Call Handling
feature (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling").
• Your extension is a Logical Extension (i.e., your mailbox receives your calls automatically, perhaps
because you do not have your own telephone for regular use).
To set a message mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
3
Enter 53.
1
Enter 1 to toggle between
Interview Mode (interview mailbox) and
Message Recording Mode (regular mailbox).
On-hook.
User Manual
179
1.8.6 Other Features
•
Not all subscribers have interview mailboxes. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
Message Waiting Notification
The Message Waiting Notification feature lets you know you have received new messages in your mailbox by:
Message Waiting Lamp:
The message lamp on your telephone (if it has one) will light when you receive a new message. If you have a
6-line display PT, you can also see the number of new messages you have on your display. If your telephone
has a Message button, the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
Device Notification:
Notifying you via a "device", i.e., an outside telephone, another PBX extension, your cellular phone, etc. You
can assign three different devices. For each device, you have the option of receiving notification for urgent
messages only, or for all messages. You can also choose to receive notification during certain hours only
(called "scheduling"), which is useful if you do not want to be disturbed at night, for example. For more
information on scheduling, consult your System Administrator.
If you turn device notification on for more than one device, the lowest numbered device (1, 2, or 3) will be used
first. If notification is not possible (for example, if your outside telephone is busy), the next device will be used.
Message notification by e-mail may also be available for your mailbox. When you receive new messages in
your mailbox, you can receive notification by e-mail. The recorded message can also be added to the e-mail
as an attachment. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
•
Displaying the number of new messages is only available with a 6-line Display PT. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
To turn Message Waiting Lamp Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
6
1
Enter 61.
180
User Manual
1
Enter 1 to enable/disable lamp notification.
On-hook.
1.8.6 Other Features
To turn Device Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
6
Log in to your mailbox.
2
desired device no.
Enter 62.
Enter the desired
device number (1–6).
Send notification
for all messages
1
1
2
OR
3
Send notification
for urgent messages only
2
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
•
Use a preprogrammed schedule
Receive notification always (continuously)
Turn off notifications
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3"
for "E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
To use the Device Notification feature for device number 1, 2, or 3, the telephone number for
each device should first be assigned.
•
To change device numbers
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
3
desired device no.
Enter 63.
Enter the desired
device number (1–3).
6
1
Enter 1 to change
the assigned number.
To delete the assigned number,
press 3 then go on-hook to finish.
outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
outside telephone no.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To store an extension number,
simply enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
User Manual
181
1.8.6 Other Features
•
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
Consult your System Administrator for more information.
•
Personal Caller Name Announcement
By storing caller telephone numbers and recording caller names, you can have the Unified Messaging system
announce the caller name to you when:
• You play back a message from one of the assigned callers.
• The system transfers a call to you from one of the assigned callers.
• The system pages you to inform you that you have a call from one of the assigned callers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
1
Enter 451.
STEP A
caller ID no.
2
#
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number, 20 digits max.)
and #.
C.Tone
State the caller’s name.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
1
Enter 1 to end
recording.
182
User Manual
2
Enter 2
to add.
1
To add more caller ID numbers.
2
End
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
1.8.6 Other Features
To change Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
5
2
Enter 452.
1
Change the Caller ID number,
then go to STEP A in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
2
Change the caller’s name,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
3
Accept the current item as is and skip to the next item,
then repeat this step.
OR
OR
On-hook.
To delete Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
On-hook.
3
Enter 453.
OR
2
Delete one number.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced number.
OR
2
Keep the number and
announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
When finished, go on-hook.
•
The number of callers you can assign for this feature is controlled by the System
Administrator.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without
answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two
methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
User Manual
183
1.8.6 Other Features
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/PS
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
184
User Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
PT
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring
OR
No operation
MONITOR
OR
Monitoring (Handset)
(Live Call
Screening)
Off-hook.
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring Answering
(Live Call
Screening)
OR
Press Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
MONITOR
OR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
OR
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
(Live Call
Screening)
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
Off-hook.
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone
in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Live Call Screening Mode Set
•
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
User Manual
185
1.8.6 Other Features
Recording Your Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
To stop recording,
press this button again.
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Two-way
Transfer)
another
extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer.
186
User Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
•
The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
Note
When you record your Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party
that the conversation is being recorded.
•
•
If all Unified Messaging system ports are busy when you try to use one of these features, you
will hear a warning tone, dial tone, or busy tone, depending on the feature you are trying to
use.
Recording time when using these features may be limited. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch
Two-way Transfer button.
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and
Toll Saver
When logging in to your mailbox remotely (i.e., from an outside telephone) to listen to your messages, the
Remote Automatic Log-in (refer to "
Remote Access") and Toll Saver features identify you by recognising
your telephone number (caller ID). In order to use these features, you must first store the telephone numbers
that you will use to access your mailbox remotely.
Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
To assign
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
9
OR
Enter 49.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number and
wish to change it, press 1 after selecting telephone
number 1 or 2.
outside telephone no.
#
Enter your outside telephone number
(max. 20 digits including area code if needed) and #.
•
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
The System Administrator must enable Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver for your mailbox
before it can be used.
User Manual
187
1.8.6 Other Features
Personal Custom Service
A Personal Custom Service is a set of options you can present to your callers, allowing them to press buttons
on their telephones in order to access certain features. You should explain the options available to your callers
in each of your personal greeting messages, for example, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now. Press
3 to leave me a message. Press 4 to speak with my assistant. Press 5 to dial another extension…". For details
on recording your greeting messages, refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting
Messages" or "
Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
You can create your own personal custom service and allow your callers to access the following features:
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox (or another mailbox you specify here) where he or she can
leave a message.
Transfer to Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to the extension you specify when creating the custom service.
Transfer to Outside:
The system will transfer the caller to the outside telephone number you specify when creating the custom
service. This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System Manager.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Voice Mail Service:
The system will prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number and leave a message.
Automated Attendant Service:
The system will prompt the caller to dial an extension number in order to speak with someone else.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the
call.
Repeat Greeting:
The caller can play your greeting message back from the beginning in order to listen to your Personal Custom
Service options once again.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator, or to your Covering Extension if you have assigned one
Assigning Your Covering Extension").
(refer to "
You can also select what happens when a caller makes no selection (No DTMF Input Operation) while listening
to your greeting, perhaps because the caller is using a rotary/pulse telephone. The caller can either be
transferred to your mailbox or be disconnected.
•
188
The following dialling keys are assigned to the following features by default, and cannot be
changed.
1
End recording
2
Begin recording while listening to personal greeting message
User Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Exit
To create your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
desired dialling key
1
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9)
that you want to assign an option to.
Transfer to a mailbox,
then enter the desired mailbox number.
Transfer to an extension,
then enter the desired extension number.
Transfer to an outside telephone
(may not be available).
• Next enter the outside line access number
and the desired outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
Transfer to a Custom Service,
then enter the desired Custom Service number.
Activate Voice Mail Service.
Activate Automated Attendant Service
(Call Transfer Service).
Activate paging.
Repeat the greeting.
Transfer to the operator.
Enter 1.
Skip this step if you are creating your
Personal Custom Service for the first time.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To delete options from your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
1
Enter 461.
desired dialling key
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9)
that you want to delete an option from.
3
Enter 3.
On-hook.
User Manual
189
1.8.6 Other Features
To select the No DTMF Input operation
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
1
1
1
Enter 1 to select
the No DTMF Input Operation.
Message recording.
Disconnect the caller.
Disconnect the caller when call was received after hours
(message recording for all other times).
Enter 1.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings for your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 46.
•
•
•
2
Enter 2
to review.
On-hook.
The System Administrator or the System Manager must enable Transfer to Outside for your
mailbox before it can be used.
The Transfer to Outside option can be used a maximum of 4 times in your Personal Custom
Service.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until cancelled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook to
answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
190
User Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
5
Enter 95.
1
Change the setting.
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
3
Cancel (turn off) the Timed Reminder,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option.
AM
1
desired time
1
# *
2
Enter the desired time and #.
•
•
*2
1
OR
Once
2
OR
PM
2
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
Daily
Enter 1 for once
or 2 for daily.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
Setting Absent Message Remotely
You can set your absent message by accessing the subscriber service menu. To login to your mailbox from
an outside telephone, refer to "
Remote Access".
To set/cancel
From Outside Telephone
1
Change the setting
7
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 7.
3
Cancel your absent message,
then go on-hook to finish.
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter the desired option.
absent message no.
Enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
On-hook.
User Manual
191
1.8.6 Other Features
•
For configuring an IMAP account, consult your System Administrator.
UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook
If you will be accessing Unified Messaging data through an IMAP connection, you must install the IMAP Session
Controller software. This software is a plug-in for Microsoft Windows. When installed, it appears in the
notification area. The software changes the selected account in the Outlook user interface from the Unified
Messaging IMAP account to the default Outlook inbox after a specified time period. Doing so enables multiple
users efficiently interact with the PBX through Microsoft Outlook.
To download IMAP Session Controller
You can download the IMAP Session Controller software from Web Maintenance Console:
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. On the Edit User screen, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
•
For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2 System Programming Using Web
Maintenance Console".
To install IMAP Session Controller
Double-click UmicSetup.exe, and then follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
To uninstall IMAP Session Controller
Uninstall this software using the programme uninstall feature in the Control Panel. For details, refer to the
documentation for your operating system.
To configure settings and view information
While this software is running, you can configure settings and view information about the software. Right-click
the icon in the notification area, and then select an item.
Notification area icon
Item
Settings
Description
Language
Select the language to use for the settings dialogue box and the notification area menu.
No Operation Timer
Enter the time period after which the selected account is changed from the Unified
Messaging account to the default Outlook inbox if there has been no user activity.
Timer value: 30 to 600 seconds
(Recommended timer value: 30 to 60 seconds)
User Manual
193
1.8.6 Other Features
Item
Description
E-Mail Account for UM
Enter your Unified Messaging e-mail account. The maximum size is 256 characters.
If nothing is entered, all of the e-mail accounts using IMAP are assumed to be Unified
Messaging accounts.
You can copy the mail account from Mail Account in the General tab of the Internet
E-mail Settings dialogue box.
• To open the Internet E-mail Settings dialogue box:
– In Outlook 2007, click the Tools menu ® Account Settings ® Change ® More
Settings button.
– In Outlook 2010, click the File menu ® Info ® Account Settings ® Change
® More Settings button.
194
About
Display the copyright and version of this software.
Exit
Exit this software.
User Manual
1.8.7 Quick Reference
1.8.7 Quick Reference
The flow below includes all top menu options and frequently used features. Only options 1–4 and 0 are
announced in the top menu when accessed. If you press 0 (help menu), you can listen to the whole top menu
(options 1–9).
The help menu may not be available from the top menu depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
To Enter a Mailbox
From a Remote
Location, Dial:
#6 + mailbox number
1
Main Menu:
You have
new messages.
Password #
Listen to New Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Send a Message:
Enter Mailbox Number
1 Record Message
2 Add Another Mailbox
3 Review Mailing List
3
Listen to Old Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
1
2
#
1
2
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Listen to New Messages
Send a Message
Listen to Old Messages
Mailbox Management
Set Automated Attendant (AA) status
Message Notification
Change Absent Message
Call-through Service
Other Features
Hang Up
Receive New Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
# Save This Message as New
0 Help
Receive Old Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
Continued on next page
User Manual
195
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
4
5
Set AA Status:
1 Set Call Transfer Status
2 Set Covering Extensions
3 Set Message Reception Mode
4 Set Incomplete Call Handling For No Answer
5 Set Incomplete Call Handing For Busy
6 Set Telephone Number for Transfer
6
Message Notification:
1 Message Waiting Lamp
2 Device Status
3 Assign Telephone Numbers
7
Change Absent Message
8
Call-through Service
Continued on next page
196
User Manual
1
Mailbox Management:
1 Record Personal Greetings
2 Set Password
3 Enter Owner's Name
4 Set Group Distribution List
5 Record Caller Name/Number
6 Set Personal Custom Service
8 Set Remote Call FWD to Outside
9 Set Numbers for Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Record Personal Greeting:
1 No Answer
2 Busy Signal
3 After Hours
4 Caller ID
5 Temporary
6 Absent Message
1
Set Call Transfer Status:
1 Call Blocking
2 Call Screening
3 Intercom Paging
4 Transfer to Mailbox
5 Transferring to Specified Custom Service
6 All Disable
4
Incomplete Handling Status:
For No Answer
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
5
Incomplete Handling Status:
For Busy
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
9
Set Other Features:
1 Listen to Deleted Message
2 Set Interview Mailbox
3 Set External Delivery Message
4 Set Remote Call Forwarding
5 Set Timed Reminder
1
Listen to Deleted Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Interview Mailbox Management:
1 Record Question
2 Set Answer Length
3 Erase Question
3
External Message Delivery:
1 Record Message
2 Set a Mailing List
4
Remote Call Forwarding Set:
1 FWD—All Calls
2 FWD—Busy
3 FWD—No Answer
4 FWD—Busy/No Answer
5 FWD to an Outside Line
6 FWD Cancel
1
2
#
Receive Deleted Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Recover Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
User Manual
197
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
–
–
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Do Not Disturb (DND)
You can set this feature to prevent incoming calls from ringing at your extension. This can be useful, for
example, when you are in a meeting or busy.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
OR
2
Off-hook.
200
Enter
71.
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
1
Set
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
•
When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Do Not Disturb by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the FWD/
DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Do Not Disturb
for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
•
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
•
The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Red on: FWD mode
Flashing red slowly: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
User Manual
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
•
The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown
below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
Switching FWD/DND Status
Using Fixed FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
•
If your extension has set this feature, a calling extension will hear DND tone.
•
If this feature is set, the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature does not work.
•
Specified extensions can override this feature and call DND extensions (DND Override).
•
When making a call using an SDN button to a PDN extension with DND set, this feature will
temporarily be deactivated.
•
When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (DND set/cancel),
we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls and FWD/
DND—Intercom calls, because:
a. the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercoms calls, but not both.
Note
The DND icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b. pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button])
will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670),
you can easily switch the FWD/DND status for outside/intercom calls without clearing
any FWD destination that was set previously.
User Manual
201
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
•
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To
set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To switch the FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch the FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
Enter 2.
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
1
Outside Calls*
OR
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
0
Intercom Calls
Enter 1 or 2.
FWD/DND off
OR
1
DND on
Enter 0 or 1.
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
202
User Manual
Press STORE.
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
•
* This step can be omitted.
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
FWD/DND Off
: FWD/DND off
OR
Do Not Disturb : DND on
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Press ENTER to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
User Manual
203
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call
Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
During a conversation, you can be informed of a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through your
built-in speaker or handset. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
Call Waiting Tone:
a waiting tone through the built-in speaker of PT/handset of SLT. To change the tone from PT, refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
OHCA:
a voice announcement through the built-in speaker
Whisper OHCA:
a voice announcement through the handset
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
No call
OR
1
7
3
1
Tone
OR
2
C.Tone
OHCA
OR
Off-hook.
Enter
731.
3
On-hook.
Whisper OHCA
Enter 0 to 3 as you desire.
To set/cancel for outside calls (Automatic Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
3
2
1
Off-hook.
Enter
No tone
OR
Tone
C.Tone
On-hook.
732.
Enter 0 or 1.
•
•
204
User Manual
OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones.
Whisper OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones and IP proprietary
telephones. In addition, both you and the other party must use supported telephones.
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line Identification
Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
CLIP:
When making an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the called party.
COLP:
When receiving an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the calling party.
You can select the telephone number sent, either the number of the line used or the number assigned to your
extension.
If you select "Public", the calling/called party sees the number of the line used (subscriber’s number).
If you select "Your extension", they see the telephone number assigned on your extension.
To show either the number assigned to the outside line or your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
2
Off-hook.
Enter
7 2.
Public
OR
Your extension
Enter 1 for public or 2
for your extension.
C.Tone
On-hook.
•
•
Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
When you forward a call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the
calling party or of the forwarding extension depending on system programming.
•
If you use the ICD Group button to make a call to the other party, the telephone number
assigned to the ICD Group will be used.
User Manual
205
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR])
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the
Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification Restriction
[COLR])
When receiving an outside call, you can select whether the caller can see your telephone number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
Off-hook.
•
•
Enter
0
7 0.
Show
OR
1
Prevent
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
C.Tone
On-hook.
You can change the mode by pressing a preset COLR button while on-hook (There is no
COLR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The COLR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) button.
206
User Manual
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification Restriction
[CLIR])
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called
Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
When making an outside call, you can select whether the called party can see your telephone number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
1
1
Off-hook.
•
•
Enter
7 1.
Show
OR
Prevent
C.Tone
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
On-hook.
You can change the mode by pressing a preset CLIR button while on-hook (There is no CLIR
button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The CLIR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) button.
User Manual
207
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation
(Executive Busy Override Deny)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
3
3
0
Off-hook.
•
208
User Manual
Enter
733.
Prevent
OR
Allow
C.Tone
Enter 1 to prevent
or 0 to allow.
Some extensions may be prohibited from performing this feature.
On-hook.
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
You can listen to the background music through your telephone speaker while on-hook.
An external music source, such as a radio, can be connected.
If your extension becomes busy (off-hook, making or receiving a call etc.), the music
stops temporarily. When you go back on-hook, the music starts again.
To select and set/cancel
PT
BGM no.
7
5
1
OR
0
Off-hook.
•
Enter
751.
Cancel
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to listen to background music.
User Manual
209
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
You can check the current status of the Time Service on the display.
PT
While on-hook
OR
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press TRANSFER or Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break).
•
•
The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
Any extension user except the managers can check the current status by pressing the Time
Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
User Manual
211
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone)
In the case where a single line telephone is connected in parallel to your digital
proprietary telephone, you can choose whether the parallelled single line telephone will
ring to an incoming call or not.
(Default: Ring)
DPT
1
3
9
0
Off-hook.
•
•
•
212
User Manual
Enter
39.
Ring
OR
No ring
Enter 1 to ring
or 0 not to ring.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Even if "No ring" is selected, calls can be made and answered on the single line telephone
by lifting the handset.
If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you.
This feature is not available for the KX-T7665.
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless
XDP Parallel Mode)
Your PS can be used in parallel with a PT, SLT, or SIP phone.
When in this mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also ring the paired PS.
To set
PS
4
Press TALK.
Enter
8
48.
1
extension no.
Enter 1.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
Press CANCEL.
To cancel
PS
4
Press TALK.
•
•
Enter
8
48.
0
Enter 0.
C.Tone
Press CANCEL.
Some wired telephones are prohibited from using this feature.
If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you (except SIP phones).
User Manual
213
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (One-numbered extension)
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone
(One-numbered extension)
Two telephones connected to the PBX can be set to share 1 extension number, and both telephones can be
set to ring (One-numbered Extension feature). You can choose whether the sub extension associated with the
main extension will ring when an incoming call is received.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
8
48.
1
extension
phone no.no.
Enter 1.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
8
0
C.Tone
Enter 0.
48.
On-hook.
To pickup call during conversation
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
4
1
extension no.
Talk.
Off-hook.
Press lit DSS of the paired telephone.
Or enter 41 and then dial extension
number of the paired telephone.
214
User Manual
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature
Clear)
You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one
operation.
This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear.
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You can reset the settings of the following features on
your extension.
– Message Waiting
– Call Forwarding (FWD)
– Timed Reminder
– Do Not Disturb (DND)
– Call Waiting for intercom calls
– Call Waiting for outside calls
– Data Line Security
– Log-in/Log-out
Features
Hot Line*1
Off
Message Waiting—(All the messages that have been left by other
extension users)
Off
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Call Forwarding (FWD)
*1
Default Setting
*1
Off
Absent Message
Off
Paging Deny
Allow
Timed Reminder
Cleared
Do Not Disturb (DND)*1
Off
Call Waiting for intercom calls*1
Call Waiting for outside calls*1
Disable (No call)
Disable (No tone)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
BGM
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Parallelled Telephone
The telephone in parallel rings.
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
These features may not be reset depending on the system programming.
User Manual
215
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
•
216
User Manual
Enter
9
790.
0
C.Tone
On-hook.
For Users in Canada Only:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, the setting of Call Waiting becomes "Enable
(Tone)". In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when you go off-hook.
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.11 Using User-supplied Equipment
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
You can talk to a person at the door through the doorphone. Preprogrammed extensions or an outside party
can receive the calls from the doorphone. You can open the door.
–
Doorphone Call
–
Opening a Door (Door Open)
Doorphone Call
To call from the doorphone
Doorphone
C.Tone
Press doorphone
button.
Talk.
To answer a call from the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
•
•
224
User Manual
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: If the doorphone number and name are stored in the
phonebook of your phone, the doorphone information is displayed on your phone when a call
arrives from the doorphone.
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The video feed from a network camera can be displayed
on your phone’s display when a call arrives from a doorphone and the following settings are
configured on your phone:
– The network camera is registered to a contact.
– The doorphone number is registered to the contact, and "Doorphone" is selected as the
label for the phone number.
For details about the settings, refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
To call the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Enter
Off-hook.
•
1
doorphone no.
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
31.
If no one answers a doorphone call within a specified time period, the call is cancelled.
Opening a Door (Door Open)
Some extensions may be prohibited from using this feature.
From a specified extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Enter
Off-hook.
5
55.
doorphone no.
C.Tone
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
On-hook.
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
C.Tone
Enter 5.
•
On-hook.
The door open will be triggered for a specified time period.
User Manual
225
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can switch on a relay (e.g., alarm) connected to the PBX.
To switch on the relay
PT/SLT/PS
5
Off-hook.
•
226
User Manual
Enter
6
56.
relay no.
C.Tone
Enter relay number
(2 digits).
The relay will be switched off after a specified time period.
On-hook.
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can receive an alert call from an external sensor (e.g., security alarm) connected
to the PBX.
To answer a sensor call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
D.Tone
Off-hook.
•
On-hook.
If you do not answer a sensor call within a specified time period, the sensor call will stop.
Dial Tone Definitions
• 5.4 What is This Tone?
User Manual
227
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
–
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
You can access special features (e.g., Call Waiting) offered by a host PBX or telephone company. This feature
is only effective for an outside call.
<Example> To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS/KX-UT series
SLT
During a conversation with an outside party
During a conversation with an outside party
OR
desired service
code
(EFA)
6
0
desired service
code
OR
6
0
Press FLASH/RECALL or EFA.
Or press TRANSFER and
then enter 60.
Enter desired
service code.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
60.
Enter desired
service code.
For KX-UT series,
press FLASH/RECALL.
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX-UT series SIP
phone must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
228
User Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
You or an outside party can access the Voice Processing System from a telephone.
–
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
If your PBX has a Panasonic Voice Processing System connected (e.g., KX-TVM series) using digital
integration, the following features are also available:
–
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
–
Recording a Conversation
•
Voice Processing System features are not available for SIP phone users.
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
– To forward your calls to your mailbox
– To transfer a call to a mailbox
– To listen to messages
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox
of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages (Voice Mail Transfer). The duration for
recording depends on the Voice Processing System. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you can also
perform the following operations with one touch (for digital integration only):
– To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
– To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
– To listen to messages
User Manual
229
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
71.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For
"Cancel",
For
"Cancel",
go on-hook
go on-hook
directly.0.
directly
after entering
voice mail floating
extension no.
#
Enter voice mail floating
extension number.
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
230
User Manual
OR
desired
extension no.
Press DSS or dial desired
extension number.
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
extension no.
OR
R.B.Tone
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
OR
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To listen to messages
PT/SLT/PS
MESSAGE
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
voice mail floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter voice mail
floating extension number.
•
*Indication tone after going off-hook
1s
•
If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without
answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two
methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
User Manual
231
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/PS
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
232
User Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring (Handset)
Monitoring
SP-PHONE
OR
No operation
MONITOR
OR
(Live Call
Screening)
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening.
Off-hook.
Stop
monitoring Answering
SP-PHONE
(Live Call
Screening)
OR
Press Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
MONITOR
OR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
SP-PHONE
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
OR
(Live Call
Screening)
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
Off-hook.
The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone
in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Live Call Screening Mode Set
•
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
User Manual
233
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Recording a Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
To stop recording,
press this button again.
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Two-way
Transfer)
another
extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer.
•
234
User Manual
The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
1.13.1 Walking Extension
1.13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions
1.13.1 Walking Extension
You can exchange the settings set at another extension with your own settings. This allows you to use your
own settings, including your extension number, on another person’s extension. Settings such as extension
number and One-touch Dialling memory are available at the new extension. It is also possible to exchange the
DSS Console settings along with the extension settings. Walking Extension is useful, for example, when you
move to a new location in the office.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
To exchange your settings with another extension
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
2
Enter
727.
7
your
extension no.
Dial your extension
number.
extension PIN
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
•
•
•
•
244
User Manual
On-hook.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
"
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
Your previous extension will receive the old settings of your new extension.
Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
If you are using a KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346
telephone with a Bluetooth wireless headset, and exchange the settings with another
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephone user, you
cannot use your Bluetooth wireless headset at the other extension.
Bluetooth wireless headsets are registered on extensions themselves. Therefore, you have
to register a Bluetooth wireless headset on each desired extension. For details about
registration, refer to "Bluetooth Registration" in "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
In addition to exchanging the settings between extensions (Walking Extension), you can change the status of
your extension to "Service-in" or "Service-out" (Enhanced Walking Extension).
Service-in: An extension is in use (normal status).
Service-out: Extension Dial Lock (® 1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension
Dial Lock)), Do Not Disturb (DND) (® 1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])) and Display
Lock (® 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode) are activated on an extension. When the extension is set
to "Service-out", the extension user cannot do the following:
• Make unauthorised outside calls
• Receive calls
• See their personal speed dialling directory, call log, or SVM log
This feature is useful when:
a. one person uses the same extension settings at different locations, such as another branch office or at
home
b. two or more people use the same telephone in turn
<Example (a)> When using extension settings at a different location
Main Office
Service-in
Service-out
Service-out
Extension status
of Telephone A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Branch Office
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension status
of Telephone B
Service-in
In this example, extension user A sets his/her own extension status to "Service-out" at the main office. Then,
he/she can set another extension status to "Service-in" at the branch office to have his/her own extension
settings available at the extension.
User Manual
245
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
<Example (b)> When two users share one telephone
User A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension
Status
User B
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-in
In this example, extension users A and B work in shifts and use the same extension in turn. User A sets the
extension status to "Service-out" when he/she finishes work. Then, user B can set the extension status to
"Service-in" and have his/her own settings available at the extension.
To set an extension to Service-out status
PT/SLT
7
2
7
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
On-hook.
Enter #.
727.
To set an extension to Service-in status and have your own settings available
PT/SLT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7
2
Enter
727.
your
extension no.
7
Enter
.
Dial your extension
number.
extension PIN
C.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
•
•
246
User Manual
On-hook.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
"
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
This is available for display proprietary telephones, portable stations, and KX-UT series SIP phones.
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
KX-UT series SIP phone users: Both outside call information and intercom call information
is recorded automatically in the incoming call log. For details about using the call log, refer
to the documentation for your KX-UT series SIP phone.
The following PSs can use the incoming call log information in the same way as a wired PT
when they receive a call from other extension (including TIE).
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
PSs other than these may not display the same incoming call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
For details about referencing the incoming call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
When you receive a call, including external sensor calls, call information is recorded automatically in the
incoming call log. A preprogrammed number of calls can be logged per extension.
When the call log is full and other call arrives, the oldest call is deleted.
You can modify the logged telephone number.
When the Call Log button light turns on, there is a call which you did not answer.
The following information is logged.
• Caller’s Name
• Date/Time call received
• Answered or Not Answered
Confirmed or Not Confirmed
• Caller’s Phone Number
To confirm the log information with the Call Log button
Display PT
While on-hook
(Call Log)
Press Call Log until
desired party appears.
User Manual
247
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
To confirm the log information with the Navigator Key
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left twice.
Press Up or Down until
desired party appears.
To clear the log information
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Press TRANSFER.
To call
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Off-hook.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
248
User Manual
Press STORE.
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
•
•
•
•
•
The Call Log button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No incoming call. Or you have already viewed the call log.
Red on: You have missed calls to view.
If your call is answered by another extension, the caller’s information is recorded on the
displays of both your extension and the answering extension.
You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number),
so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
You can also have a Call Log button for an ICD Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group).
If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Log button or Call Log for ICD Group button.
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
You can redial using the outgoing call log.
To call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left.
•
•
•
Press Up or Down
until desired number
appears.
Off-hook.
The following PSs can use outgoing call log information to other extensions (including TIE)
with same information as a PT connected to the PBX.
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
PSs other than these may not display the same outgoing call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
For details about referencing the outgoing call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
To call with the REDIAL button
Display PT
While on-hook
REDIAL
Press REDIAL to
display the outgoing
call log.*
REDIAL
Press REDIAL.
Press Up or Down
until desired number
appears.
Off-hook.
User Manual
249
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
•
•
* System programming is required for this operation.
This operation is available only for PTs with a display.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
When the desired party is displayed
Press STORE.
•
•
250
User Manual
You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number),
so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
1.14.2 Using the Directories
1.14.2 Using the Directories
You can call using the directories (Personal Speed Dialling Directory, System Speed Dialling Directory and
Extension Number Directory).
Only personal directories can be stored, edited or deleted on your extension.
If a call arrives while you are using a directory, the display will be replaced with the caller’s information.
–
Calling with the Directory
–
Storing Names and Numbers
–
Entering Characters
•
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your PS.
Calling with the Directory
To select and call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right until
desired directory
appears.*
•
•
•
•
•
Press Up or Down
until desired
party appears.
Off-hook.
* The display order is as follows:
One time: Personal Speed Dialling Directory
Two times: System Speed Dialling Directory
Three times: Extension Number Directory
To cancel or exit, press the CANCEL or FLASH/RECALL button.
You can lock your personal speed dialling directory by using an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number), so that you can prohibit access to it (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
Directory entries generally should include name and number. If the name is not registered,
an entry cannot be displayed.
The System Speed Dialling Directory can be displayed simply by pressing the AUTO DIAL/
STORE button while on-hook.
User Manual
251
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Storing Names and Numbers
To store a Personal Speed Dialling Directory item
Display PT
While on-hook
phone no.
PROG.
OR
name
OR
OR
PAUSE
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
252
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Enter name
(max. 20 characters).
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
•
Telephone numbers and names displayed are stored using the first spare Personal Speed
Dialling memory available.
•
For more details, refer to "To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling" in
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
User Manual
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Entering Characters
You can enter the following characters. The tables show you the characters available for each button. Table
1 or Table 2 can be programmed.
Note
For NE models, the tables for Option mode differ depending on the system settings. For details, consult
your dealer.
Table 1 (Standard mode)
User Manual
253
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
You can access a feature with the "Feature Access" menu.
To access "Feature Access" menu and select the feature
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right Press Up or Down
until the feature appears.
four times.
Features
Refer to
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Group Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Directed Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Paging
1.7.1 Paging
Doorphone Call
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Door Open
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
External Relay
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
External Background Music
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Menu
OR
Press "Menu".
OR
Press Up or Down
until the feature appears.*
Features
Refer to
Group Paging
1.7.1 Paging
Directed Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
User Manual
257
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
Features
Directed Group Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Data Line Security
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security)
•
258
Refer to
User Manual
*For KX-UT670 users:
Tap "Feature access code" instead of pressing Up or Down.
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
The KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 IP-PT and KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone have flexible
buttons with an LCD screen next to the buttons.
For KX-NT366:
The KX-NT366 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display 3
other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension
number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 48 flexible buttons are available.
Page 4
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
For KX-NT553/KX-NT556:
The KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature,
telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to
display other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments as below.
Pages
Total Flexible button
KX-NT553
2
24
KX-NT556
3
36
Example: KX-NT556
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
For KX-NT560:
The KX-NT560 IP-PT has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page key to display 3 other sets
User Manual
259
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be
assigned to each button in each set. This means that 32 flexible buttons are available.
Page 4
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out Company-D
Log-in S-CO5
Company-C
Log-outS-CO6
Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
For KX-UT248:
The KX-UT248 SIP phone has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page keys to display 2 other sets
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be
assigned to each button in each set. This means that 24 flexible buttons are available.
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out Company-D
Log-in S-CO5
Company-C
Log-out S-CO6
Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
For KX-UT670:
The KX-UT670 SIP phone has 24 flexible buttons. Each button can be assigned a feature, telephone number,
extension number, etc., with a custom label for each. You can switch the display between single-row display
and full-screen display. In single-row display, 6 flexible buttons are displayed, and you can press the Page key
to display another row of buttons. In full-screen display, all 24 flexible buttons are displayed at once.
Row 4
Row 3
Row 1
Row 2
Bank
DN-1
Home
DN-1
Sales-1
DN-3
Sales-2
DN-4
To switch display
KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670
OR
OR
OR
Press NEXT PAGE or Page key
to display the desired page.
260
User Manual
OR
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
•
For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users:
– When you answer an incoming call or when you seize an outside line, the display
automatically changes to the page that contains the green lit button.
– After customising each button, you can set the displayed text for the button. For details
about customising buttons, refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons".
•
For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users:
– You can customise the flexible buttons and set the displayed text for each button using
Web Maintenance Console. For details about customising buttons, refer to "Customising
the Flexible Buttons" in "
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console" in
"3.2.1 User Programming".
– For the KX-UT248, the display shows a maximum of 10 characters for each button. For
the KX-UT670, you can specify up to 12 characters, but some characters may not be
displayed depending on the characters used.
User Manual
261
Section 2
Manager Operation
This section shows the manager how to control the other
extensions or the PBX.
User Manual
267
2.1.1 Extension Control
2.1 Control Features
2.1.1 Extension Control
The manager extension can control the settings of other extensions.
–
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
To lock/unlock other extensions (Remote Extension Dial Lock)
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
2
7
8
3
Off-hook.
•
268
User Manual
Enter
78.
Unlock
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
Lock
Enter 2 to unlock
or 3 to lock.
Enter extension
number.
On-hook.
The manager can use Remote Extension Dial Lock to unlock any extension, whether that
extension was locked remotely (Remote Extension Dial Lock) or from the extension itself
(Extension Dial Lock).
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
The manager extension or the preprogrammed extension can change the time mode (Day, Lunch, Break or
Night).
There are two methods (Automatic or Manual) of changing the time modes.
Automatic: enables the time mode for each day of the week to change automatically. You may also change
it manually.
Manual: enables to change a mode manually as follows.
To change the time mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
until the desired mode
appears.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0 Day
7
8
0
1 Night
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
780.
Enter 0 to 3
as you desire.
On-hook.
To select the time service switching mode (Automatic/Manual)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual))
Press Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual).
•
•
•
Besides the time mode, there is Holiday mode. It can change mode once on a specified date.
The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
The Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button light shows the current status
as follows:
Off: Automatic
Red on: Manual
User Manual
269
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
The manager extension can select and broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
To select and start/stop the background music
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
external
pager no.
3
5
OR
BGM no.
OR
C.Tone
0
Off-hook.
•
272
Enter
35.
Enter external
pager number
(1 digit) or for all.
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to stop.
On-hook.
One-look Network
In a One-look network, pagers are numbered sequentially based on the site number and the pager’s port
(2 digits). For more information, consult your system administrator.
User Manual
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out)
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk
Busy Out)
When a problem is found on a certain outside line, the PBX automatically makes it unavailable for use
temporarily. The manager can manually enable the outside line and allow users to use it again.
To re-enable an outside line
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
•
7
8
Enter
785.
5
outside line no.
C.Tone
Enter outside line number
(3 digits).
On-hook.
In some countries/areas, the PBX may not be able to automatically make a faulty outside line
unavailable for use.
User Manual
275
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
NDSS buttons can be customised on any extension connected to your PBX. An NDSS
button allows an extension user to monitor another extension connected to another PBX
in a private network. The NDSS button light shows the current status of the monitored
extension in the same way as a DSS button. When it becomes unnecessary to monitor
an extension connected to another PBX, the manager can stop the PBX from monitoring
it. Any NDSS buttons set to monitor that extension will also stop monitoring.
PT/PS
7
8
4
another PBX
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
•
Enter
784.
Dial another PBX extension
number and then enter #, or
press NDSS.
To restart monitoring of an extension after performing this operation, go off-hook, press the
corresponding NDSS button, and go on-hook.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
276
User Manual
On-hook.
2.2.1 System Manager Features
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2.1 System Manager Features
The System Manager can configure mailboxes, change class of service (COS) settings for subscribers, etc.
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
Setting Up Mailboxes
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
Broadcasting Messages
Changing the System Manager’s Password
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the System Manager to use a telephone, however, many of
these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the System Manager must log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. To log in as the System Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the UM
group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the System Manager’s mailbox
number, and the System Manager’s mailbox password.
– The System Manager’s mailbox number is 999 (default) depending on the mailbox number length specified
in system programming.
– The System Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Changing the
Console or by the System Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
System Manager’s Password").
•
•
•
•
•
•
Before the System Manager can perform any System Manager tasks, "System Manager
Access from Telephone" must be enabled and "Password for System Manager (Up to 16
numeric digits)" must be set by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the System Manager.
If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
System Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the System
Manager’s COS.
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
For more information on logging in, refer to "Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time".
Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
Message Manager service
System Manager service
User Manual
277
2.2.1 System Manager Features
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
System Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and System Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 999).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
System Manager password
#
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter System Manager password and #.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
System Manager password
#
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter System Manager
password and #.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
278
User Manual
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Setting Up Mailboxes
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system
organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can create and edit subscriber mailboxes by following the steps below.
When creating a new mailbox, or editing a mailbox’s parameters, the following parameters can be set:
• Mailbox Number
• Subscriber’s Name:
The system allows a maximum of 10 seconds for each name. The name should be spoken slowly and
clearly. (We recommend using the subscriber’s last name.)
• Extension Number
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the owner’s last name.
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s First Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the subscriber’s first name.
• Class of Service Number:
Enter any COS number (1–64).
• Interview Mailbox Number:
Interview Mailbox Numbers must not be the same number as an existing mailbox.
• All Calls Transfer To Mailbox (Change Logical Extension Status):
If this parameter is enabled, the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls
directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension
mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.
• Message Waiting Lamp Notification:
If this parameter is enabled, the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a
new message is recorded.
• External Message Delivery:
Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non-subscribers (including outside
parties). If enabled, the prompt mode setting determines the language heard when the system calls the
recipient.
• Auto Forwarding:
Moves or copies unplayed messages from one mailbox to another, after a specified period of time.
To create/edit/delete any mailbox parameter
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
To exit
STEP B
STEP A
1
Enter 51.
1
Enter 1
to assign
or edit.
subscriber's
mailbox no.
Enter the subscriber's
mailbox number.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter
.
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
User Manual
279
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Steps
Subscriber’s Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Record the subscriber’s name.
3.
2 to accept.
Extension Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the subscriber’s extension number.
3.
2 to accept.
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s Last Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s last name.
3.
2 to accept.
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s First Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s first name.
3.
2 to accept.
Class of Service Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Class of Service Number (1–64).
3.
2 to accept.
Interview Mailbox Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Interview Mailbox Number.
3.
2 to accept.
All Calls Transfer To
Mailbox (Change Logical
Extension Status)
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Message Waiting Lamp
Notification
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Device Notification for
Unreceived Messages
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
External Message Delivery
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
•
Prompt Mode
2.
If set to "Enable", go to "Prompt Mode".
2 to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
3
for Caller Select.
•
For System, enter the system prompt number (1–8).
2.
4 to accept the current setting, then go to "External Message
Delivery".
280
User Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Auto Forwarding
Steps
1.
1
•
2.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
If set to "Disable":
a. The following mailbox settings are skipped.
– Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Forwarding Delay Time
– Forwarding Mode
b. The Auto Forwarding parameter is the last parameter to be
entered.
c. To continue assigning or editing other mailboxes, go back to
STEP B.
.
d. To finish, enter
2
to accept.
Forwarding Mailbox
Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the forwarding mailbox number.
3.
2 to accept.
Forwarding Delay Time
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the delay time, and
Forwarding Mode
#
.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (Copy or Move).
2.
2
to accept, then go to "Auto Forwarding".
To delete a mailbox
The System Manager should delete mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another person accesses the
Unified Messaging system, the action is automatically cancelled.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
1
2
3. Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1 to delete the mailbox.
To reset a mailbox password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must reset the password before it can be reassigned by
the subscriber.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
1
3
3. Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1 to delete the password.
User Manual
281
2.2.1 System Manager Features
•
•
The System Manager password cannot be reset here. The System Administrator can reset
the System Manager password using Web Maintenance Console.
After the password is reset, if the System Administrator has set "Default Password for New
Mailboxes" to "Enable", the password will be set to the default password. If set to "Disable",
the mailbox will have no password.
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
A Class of Service (COS) defines the set of system services available to the mailboxes assigned to it. There
are 66 Classes of Service; they can be assigned to mailboxes by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using a telephone. COS No. 65 and No. 66 are assigned by
default to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot set COS parameters. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
To set COS parameters
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
2
Enter 52.
Parameters
Personal Greeting Length*1
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
class of
service no.
Enter the class of
service number (1–66).
Steps
1.
1
to change the greeting length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the greeting length (1–360 s).
3.
2 to accept.
New Message Retention
Time
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Saved Message Retention
Time
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
282
User Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Message Length
Steps
1.
1
to change the message length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the message length (1–60 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Total Message Time
Available per Mailbox
1.
1
to change the total message time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the total message time (1–600 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Message Retrieval Order
Prompt Mode
1.
1 to change the current setting (LIFO [Last In First Out] or FIFO
[First In First Out]).
2 to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
•
2.
For System, enter system prompt number (1–8).
3 to accept.
Delete Message
Confirmation
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Message Envelope
Playback Mode
1.
1
for Before.
2
for After.
3
for Require.
4
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
4
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Callback
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting*1
Use Call Waiting on Busy*1
Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening*1
User Manual
283
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Intercom Paging Group*1
Steps
1.
1
to change the paging group.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the group number (1–33).
3.
2 to accept.
Maximum Number of Caller
IDs for Caller Name
Announcement*1
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the number of announcements that can be programmed by
subscribers (1–30/0: None).
3.
2 to accept.
Mailbox Capacity Warning
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the warning threshold (1–60 min or 0: None).
3.
2 to accept.
Personal Greeting for Caller
ID*1
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Screen*1
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Normal Mode.
2
for Simplified Mode.
3
to disable.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Call Transfer to Outside*1
Subscriber Tutorial*1
Notify of Transfer
Directory Listing*1
Auto Receipt
Autoplay New Message
First Playback Urgent
Messages
284
User Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Announce Message
Transferred Information
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Announce Option Menu
After Erasing Messages
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
New Message Length
Announcement
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Announcement
*1
Steps
Not available for COS No. 65 (Message Manager) and COS No. 66 (System Manager)
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
You can set the time service mode from an outside telephone even when you are away from the office.
To set the time service mode
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3. Enter the tenant number and
#
.
4.
1 to change.
5. Select the desired Time Service mode entry.
1
to set Day mode.
2
to set Night mode.
3
to set Lunch mode.
4
to set Break mode.
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
When the Unified Messaging system answers calls, it greets the callers with a Company Greeting and then
activates an Incoming Call Service. The System Manager or System Administrator can choose:
– The appropriate company greeting for each time mode (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break) of each call service.
The default company greeting is Company Greeting 1. If the Company Greeting 1 is not recorded, nothing
will not be played.
– The desired Incoming Call Service for each time mode of each call service. The default service is Custom
Service 1 for Day/Lunch/Break mode, and Custom Service 2 for Night mode. If the Custom Service is not
recorded, Automated Attendant service will be played.
– The assignment of the Service Group for each Unified Messaging extension number/Trunk.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting.
The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
User Manual
285
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the service group setting
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3
3.
2 to change the Service Group setting.
4. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
5. Select the desired Time Service period entry.
6.
7.
1
for Day Time service.
2
for Night Time service.
3
for Lunch Time service.
4
for Break Time service.
1
to change the Company Greeting.
2
to change the Incoming Call Service, then go to step 10.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept.
8. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to change a Company Greeting number.
2
to set the System Greeting, then go to step 13.
3
to disable, then go to step 13.
9. Enter a Company Greeting number (1–32), then go to step 13.
10. 1 to change the setting.
2
to accept.
11. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to set Voice Mail Service, then go to step 13.
2
to set Automated Attendant Service, then go to step 13.
3
to set Custom Service.
4
to set Interview Service.
6
to set Transfer to Mailbox.
12. Enter the Custom Service number (1–200), or the Mailbox number.
13. 2 to accept.
To change the service group assignment
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3
3.
1 to change the Service Group Assignment.
4. Enter the Unified Messaging extension number.
5.
1 to change the service group, then go to step 6.
2
to accept.
6. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
7.
2 to accept.
286
User Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Broadcasting Messages
The System Manager can deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation. Messages can be
sent to all subscribers (Broadcasting Message feature) or to specified subscribers only. When delivering a
message to specified subscribers, the System Manager can receive verification when the recipients listen to
the message.
•
The System Manager can set the date and time when a message is delivered. The date can
be set up to one month in advance.
To deliver messages to all mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver a message to multiple subscribers
with one operation. Broadcast messages have priority over other regular or urgent messages, but otherwise
are treated like regular messages. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current system
status such as remaining capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be erased, etc.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to record a broadcast message.
4.
1
to end recording.
5.
2
to accept.
To deliver messages to specified mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscribers by specifying their mailbox numbers.
User Manual
287
2.2.1 System Manager Features
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
• Enter by name by pressing #
1 first. Use a Mailbox Group by specifying its number.
4.
2
to accept.
5.
1
to record a message.
•
6.
Enter
2 to add mailbox numbers. Enter
to cancel message transfer.
1 to end recording.
7.
2
8.
1
•
to review the mailing list. Enter
to accept.
to specify the delivery time.
1
Enter
1
2
to send the message immediately, then go to step 13.
9. Enter the desired delivery time, then
10.
3
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
#
.
•
This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
11. Enter the day of the month for delivery, then # .
Example:
• If today is February 16 and you enter 1
7
# , the message will be delivered
tomorrow.
• If today is February 16 and you enter 5
# , the message will be delivered on March
5.
12. 2 to accept.
13.
14.
1
to make the message urgent.
2
to continue.
1
to make the message private.
2
to continue.
Changing the System Manager’s Password
The System Manager must enter the System Manager password in order to log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max. 16 digits)
password that cannot be easily guessed.
•
288
User Manual
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the System Manager password. The system will announce,
"Sorry, this function is not available".
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the System Manager’s password
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the mailbox password.
2
to accept the current setting.
4. Enter the desired password, then
5.
2
#
.
to accept.
User Manual
289
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
The Message Manager can maintain the general delivery mailbox, change notification settings, record/delete
prompts, etc.
–
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
–
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
–
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
Recording Messages
–
–
Remote Call Forwarding Set
–
Setting the Timed Reminder
–
Day/Night Recording Menu
Recording an Emergency Greeting
–
–
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the Message Manager to use a telephone, however, many
of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the Message Manager must log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. To log in as the Message Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the Message Manager’s
mailbox number, and the Message Manager’s mailbox password.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox number is 998 (default) depending on the mailbox number length
specified in system programming.
– The Message Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Customising the
Console or by the Message Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
Message Manager’s Mailbox").
•
•
•
•
•
Before the Message Manager can perform Message Management (recording Custom
Service Menus, messages, etc.), "Message Manager Access from Telephone" must be
enabled and "Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)" must be set by the
System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the Message Manager.
If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
Message Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the Message
Manager’s COS.
For more information on logging in, refer to "
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
290
User Manual
Message Manager service
System Manager service
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Message Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
OR
Off-hook.
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and Message Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 998).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter Message Manager password and #.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter Message Manager password and #.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
•
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
User Manual
291
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter Message Manager
password and #.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer
them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (Mailbox Groups may be used). This can be done at any time
using the telephone.
To listen to messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his or her mailbox. He
or she can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if necessary, transfer them to
their intended recipients.
292
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
1 to receive the message.
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to listen to new messages.
2
to listen to old messages.
3
to listen to deleted messages.
4. The system plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was
recorded.
1 to repeat this message.
1
•
to replay the previous message.
1
2
to play the next message.
3
to delete this new/old message or recover this deleted message.
4
to reply to this new/old message.
5
to transfer this new/old message.
6
to listen to the message envelope.
System programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message,
after each message, or only when you press
6 .
7
to rewind a voice message during playback.
8
to pause or restart the message during playback.
8
4
to increase playback volume during playback.
8
5
to set a Bookmark for the voice message during voice message playback.
8
6
to start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message.
9
to fast-forward during playback.
#
to save as new (when the new message is listened).
0
to listen to the entire menu.
To transfer messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox should be transferred to their intended recipients on a regular
basis. The Message Manager can add his or her own voice comments when necessary. When a message is
transferred, the original message is not deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox; it must be deleted manually.
1. Start with step 1–5 in "To listen to messages" above.
5
while listening to the message to transfer.
2. Enter the destination mailbox number.
3.
2 to accept.
4.
2
•
to record a comment.
Enter
1
to transfer messages without comment. Enter
Enter
4
to review the Mailing List.
5.
1
to end recording.
6.
2
to accept.
3
to add a mailbox number.
User Manual
293
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
The Unified Messaging system can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his
or her mailbox by turning on the message waiting lamp and/or calling an external device (i.e., telephone).
The Unified Messaging system can also send notification via e-mail if the System Administrator has enabled
this feature.
To set notification by Message Waiting Lamp
The system lights the message waiting lamp on the Message Manager’s extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager’s mailbox.
•
Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling "9/0 (default)". However, when
setting this feature the extension number (not "9/0 [default]") must be specified. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
When a 6-line display PT is used, the number of new (unplayed) messages will be displayed
while the message waiting lamp is lit. If the telephone has a Message button, the Message
light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
•
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4.
1
to change.
2
to accept.
Setting Notification by External Device
The system calls the preprogrammed telephone number when a new message is recorded in the Message
Manager’s mailbox. Set the following parameters as needed.
To assign notification numbers
A maximum of 3 telephone numbers can be set for message notification. It is also possible to have the caller
select whether or not he or she wishes to enter a callback number.
294
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
3 to assign a telephone number.
4. Enter the desired number.
1
to change the first telephone number.
2
to change the second telephone number.
3
to change the third telephone number.
5.
1 to change.
6. Dial the telephone number.
7.
2 to accept.
8.
1
to change the telephone number.
2
to accept.
3
to review.
4
to add more digits.
5
to insert a pause.
6
to insert a wait for dial tone.
To set device status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The Message Manager
can enable a device according to a schedule. However, the System Administrator must first assign a
destination number to the desired device.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the device number (1–6).
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3" for
"E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
• If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number 1, 2, or 3, you
cannot set the device status. Refer to "To assign notification numbers" to assign a telephone
number.
4. Select the desired message type.
1 to notify all messages.
2
to notify urgent messages.
5. Select when the device will be used for message notification.
1 for schedule (a notification is sent each time a message is received, but only during the
times programmed by the System Administrator).
2 for continuously.
3
for disable (notifications are not sent).
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The Message Manager can customise the Message Manager’s mailbox by changing the following parameters.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox password
– The extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3
User Manual
295
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
– Telephone numbers 1 and 2 used for call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to
an outside line
•
•
•
•
296
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot customise his or her mailbox. The system will announce, "Sorry,
this function is not available".
Message Manager’s Password:
The Message Manager must enter the Message Manager password in order to log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max.
16 digits) password that cannot be easily guessed.
Operator’s Extensions:
When callers require help, they can dial the operator call number to be transferred to an operator. A
maximum of 3 operators can be programmed for each time mode; these operators are not necessarily the
same as the operator extensions programmed for the PBX. The extension assigned as Operator 1 for the
day mode is designated as the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to Outside:
After programming/changing the telephone numbers used for Remote Call Forward to Outside, the
Remote Call Forwarding
Message Manager must reset the remote call forwarding setting (refer to "
Set"), even if it was already enabled. Telephone numbers set here will not be effective until remote call
forwarding is reset. If you do not reset remote call forwarding, calls will be forwarded to the old telephone
numbers.
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To customise the message manager’s mailbox
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the password.
2
to accept.
4. Enter the password, then
.
#
5.
2 to accept.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the operator’s extension.
2
to accept.
3
to delete, then go to step 9.
• Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Dial the extension number.
8.
2 to accept.
9. Repeat steps 6–8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and Break
Modes for each operator.
10. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 1 setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to step 13.
11. Dial the telephone number ( 0 – 9 ,
[max. 32 digits]).
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an
outside line).
2 to accept.
12.
13. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 2 setting.
2
to accept the current setting.
14. Dial the telephone number (
15.
2
0
–
9
,
[max. 32 digits]).
to accept.
Recording Messages
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (menus, voice labels, system
prompts, and system caller names) and is also responsible for maintaining the following:
• Company Greetings:
A maximum of 32 company greetings for business/non-business and lunch/break hours as well as holidays
can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
• Company Name
• Custom Service Menus:
A maximum of 200 custom service menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services
they require without the need for a human operator.
• Voice Labels:
A maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice
label.
• System Prompts:
The Message Manager can change system prompts by recording new prompts and restoring them.
User Manual
297
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
Multilingual Selection Menu:
With this menu, callers can select the language they prefer for voice guidance. For example, the Message
Manager can record a menu that announces:
"For English, press 7."
"For French, press 8."
The System Caller Names:
A maximum of 200 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator. The Message
Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number.
On Hold Announcement Menu:
With this menu, callers in a queue can listen to the announcement or music while they are on hold.
•
•
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot record any messages. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
To record menus and voice labels
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4 to record messages.
3. Enter the desired number to record.
1
for Company Greetings.
2
for Company Name.
3
for Custom Service Menus.
4
for Voice Labels for Mailbox Groups.
5
for System Prompts.
6
for Multilingual Selection Menu.
7
for System Caller Names.
8
for On Hold Announcement Menu.
4. For the item selected in step 3, follow these steps:
a. For Company Greetings: Enter the Company Greeting Number (1–32).
b. For the Company Name: Go to step 5.
c. For Custom Service Menus: Enter a Custom Service Number (1–200).
• Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
d. For Voice Labels: Enter the number of the Mailbox Group to be labelled. (The System
Administrator assigns list numbers.)
e. For the Multilingual Selection Menu: Go to step 5.
f. For the On Hold Announcement Menu: Go to step 5.
5.
1
•
6.
7.
to change the message.
If a message has not yet been recorded, go to step 7.
to record a message.
1
2
to erase the current message, then go to step 3 or 4.
1
to end recording.
8.
2 to accept.
9. Repeat steps 4–8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or Voice
Labels.
298
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To record system prompts
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
5 to record messages.
3. Enter the system prompt number you want to change.
4. To change specific prompts, go to step 5.
To change all prompts one after another without reviewing the current recording, go to step 6.
5. To change specific prompts:
a.
1
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change (refer to "
List of Prompts for VM and AA
Service").
c. The system plays the prompt number and its prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded,
the system plays the system prompt. If a prompt is turned off, "The prompt is now turned
off" will play before the prompt.
d.
1 to record.
e.
1
to end recording.
f.
2 to accept.
g. Repeat steps 5b to 5f to record other prompts.
6. To change all prompts one after another.
a.
2
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change.
c.
1 to change.
d.
1
to end recording.
e.
2 to accept.
f. The system plays the next prompt number.
g. Repeat steps 6c to 6f to record other prompts.
•
It is possible to restore the original system prompts. Consult your System Administrator about
this feature.
To record system caller names
Before recording System Caller Names, the associated telephone numbers must first be programmed using
Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
User Manual
299
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3.
7 to modify system caller names.
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number (1–200).
• Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
• Enter
to go to step 3.
5.
•
•
6.
to change the name.
1
If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to step 6.
Enter
2 to accept or
3 to erase the current name, then go to step 4.
to end recording.
1
7.
2 to accept.
8. Repeat steps 4–7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
Remote Call Forwarding Set
The Message Manager can program his or her extension from a remote location to forward various types of
calls to the desired extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
• FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
• FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy.
• FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when there is no answer.
• FWD Busy or No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer.
• FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any
other telephone number.
• FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
•
•
•
300
User Manual
This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
In order to use the FWD to Outside option, the ability to forward calls to trunks must be
enabled through system programming.
Before setting Remote Call Forwarding to Outside, you should first store up to 2 destination
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
telephone numbers (refer to "
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To assign Remote Call Forwarding set
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3. Select the desired forwarding setting.
1
for FWD All.
2
for FWD Busy.
3
for FWD No Answer.
4
for FWD Busy or No Answer.
5
for FWD to Outside, then go to step 6.
6
for FWD Cancel, then go to step 9.
4. Enter the extension number.
5.
2 to accept the extension number, then go to step 10.
•
Enter
1
to change the extension number, then go to step 4.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
for telephone number 1, then go to step 8.
2
for telephone number 2, then go to step 8.
3
for another telephone number.
•
Before you can forward your calls to telephone number 1 or 2, you should first store the
telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature.
7. Enter the telephone number ( 0 – 9 ,
). (max. 32 digits)
•
8.
•
Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an
outside line).
2 to accept, then go to step 10.
Enter
1
to change the telephone number, then go to step 6.
9.
2 to accept.
10. The new settings are transmitted to the system. If the setting has been completed properly, you
will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call forwarding is cancelled" as appropriate.
•
If the system announces, "Call forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination
number.", the forwarding setting has not been completed properly, possibly because a
nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Timed Reminder
The Message Manager can set or cancel the Timed Reminder. The telephone will ring at the set time according
to the set mode (Once/Daily).
•
•
This feature is not available for PSs.
This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
User Manual
301
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To set/cancel
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
6
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept, then go on-hook to finish.
3
to cancel (turn off), then go on-hook to finish.
4. Enter the desired time, then
5. Enter the desired number.*
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
#
.
6. Enter the desired number.
7.
1
to set once.
2
to set daily.
2
to accept.
•
* This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
The time format (12 or 24 hour) is determined by the "Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp"
setting. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Day/Night Recording Menu
A Day and Night Menu can be recorded as "Custom Service 1–2" directly from the top menu.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
7 for Custom Service 1 Menu (Day).
3.
8
for Custom Service 2 Menu (Night).
1
to change the message.
4.
1 to record a message.
5. Record the message.
6.
1 to end recording.
7.
302
to accept.
2
•
This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
•
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Recording an Emergency Greeting
An emergency greeting can be recorded as "Company Greeting 1" directly from the top menu. The emergency
greeting can be used in times such as when the company must be closed due to bad weather.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
9
3.
to change the message.
1
4.
1 to record a message.
5. Record the greeting.
6.
1 to end recording.
7.
to accept.
2
•
This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
•
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
There are over 1000 system prompts in the Unified Messaging system. These prompts can be customised by
re-recording them to change their content, or can be recorded in various languages. The maximum length of
a prompt is fixed at 6 minutes.
When recording prompts in other languages, most often it is not necessary to record all prompts contained in
the Unified Messaging system; recording over 1000 system prompts is a big undertaking. When a caller is
connected to AA service or VM service, most likely he or she will only hear a small selection of the following
prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or modify) the prompts that callers will hear.
Please change prompts to suit the application. For example, prompt no. 1211 could be re-recorded to
announce, "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the Unified Messaging System".
It is possible to record the prompts you wish to modify on your computer in .wav format and upload them to
the Unified Messaging system. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
363
Good afternoon
364
Good evening
365
Good morning
1211
Welcome to the Unified Messaging System
973
To enter by name, press the hash sign and 1
974
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
User Manual
303
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
221
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s last name
326
For 'Q', press 7
327
For 'Z', press 9
693
Sorry, there are no more matching names
701
Sorry, this name cannot be found
392
Incorrect entry
842
To call the operator, press 0
90
Calling the operator
599
Please wait a moment
1201
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
596
Please leave a message at the tone
966
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
1026
To pause and restart recording, press 2
1060
To review, press 1
818
To accept, press 2
979
To erase and try again, press 3
829
To add, press 4
978
To erase and exit, press
1018
To make this message private, press 1
558
Otherwise, press 2
733
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
593
Please enter your party’s mailbox number
219
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first name
220
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first or last name
1019
To make this message urgent, press 1
AA Prompts
Prompt No.
304
Modifiable Prompts
592
Please enter your party’s extension
1224
You have a call
690
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
User Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
1006
To leave a message, press 1
971
To enter another extension, press
698
Sorry, this line is busy
388
If you would like to hold, press 1
847
To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party again.
User Manual
305
Section 3
Customising Your Phone & System
This section shows you how to customise your
individual telephone or PBX according to your needs.
Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
User Manual
307
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal
Programming)
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
You can customise your telephone features. For example, you can change the initial settings or button features
according to your needs.
–
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number])
•
If you change your desk and extension, refer to "1.13.1 Walking Extension".
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal
Identification Number])
You can assign a password to each extension.
The following features require an extension PIN.
1. Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
2. Prohibiting other people from seeing your personal speed dialling directory, call log, SVM log, and from
playing back the voice messages in your message box (Display Lock)
3. Using the same settings as your extension at other extensions (Walking Extension)
4. Remote Control Operation (Walking COS)
5. Extension Dial Lock Clear
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
#
Enter #.
308
User Manual
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
9
Enter
799.
same
extension PIN
Enter same extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
extension PIN
1
9
Enter 1.
#
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
9
Enter
799.
9
0
Enter 0.
stored
extension PIN
C.Tone
Enter stored
extension PIN.
On-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
•
•
•
Valid numbers for an extension PIN are "0" through "9".
If the wrong extension PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN is locked.
If you forget your extension PIN or your extension PIN is locked, your manager can clear the
extension PIN and extension PIN lock.
User Manual
309
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
You can programme features using the programming mode for a PT or PS.
–
Setting Features
–
Clearing Features
•
•
•
To exit at any time, lift the handset.
To enter the programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot programme the following features using a
KX-UT series SIP phone. These features are programmed via Web Maintenance Console.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting Features
The default settings are shown in bold letters. For later reference, place a check mark in the boxes below to
indicate your customised setting.
Notice
The default value may vary depending on country/area.
To enter the programming mode
To programme
To exit
PROG.
PROG.
OR
programming
input
selection &
parameter
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Item
Your extension information
Display Contrast Selection*1
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available
310
User Manual
OR
PAUSE
Follow
programming
input.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Follow Selection Press ENTER Press PROGRAM
& Parameter.
or PAUSE.
or STORE.
Programming
Input
0
0
0
Selection & Parameter
The display shows your PT or PS’s extension number.
<Example>
Ext 101
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
1
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Display Language
Selection
Which display language do
you prefer?
Display Switching Mode
Would you like the call
duration to be shown
automatically on the display
when answering an outside
call?
Display Backlight
Selection*1*2
Would you like to turn on the
display backlight of the
telephone?
Self Labelling Display
Contrast
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available for Self Labelling
(KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556 only)
Hot Line
Would you like to dial a preset
number simply by going
off-hook?
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Should you prevent your
number being displayed on
the called party’s telephone?
Programming
Input
0
2
0
0
0
1
English
2
2nd Language
3
3rd Language
4
4th Language
5
5th Language
0
No—Manual (The display
keeps showing all of the outside
caller’s information unless you
change it to the call duration
manually.)
1
Yes—Automatic (The first
line of the display will change
to the call duration
automatically when you
answer an outside call.)
3
4
0
Yes—Automatic
1
Yes—always On
2
No—always Off
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
5
1
1
1
2
1
Selection & Parameter
desired no. (max. 32 digits)
Available characters: 0–9, , #, P (Pause)
0
Do not use
1
Use
0
No—Allows your number
to be displayed
1
Yes—Prevent your number
being displayed
3
User Manual
311
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Which number should be
displayed on the called and
calling party’s telephone?
Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing
Which do you prefer to seize
when you go off-hook to make
calls?
Programming
Input
1
1
Selection & Parameter
0
Caller ID assigned to your
extension
1
Caller ID assigned on the
outside line being used
4
9
0
No line
1
An idle outside line
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
Intercom (On a PDN
extension, an idle PDN button is
selected when going off-hook.)
or
(PDN)
No line
0
The longest ringing line
(when multiple calls arrive)
1
Preferred Line
Assignment—Incoming
Which line do you prefer to
answer when you go
off-hook?
2
0
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
(PDN)
0
Alternate Receiving—Ring/
Voice*1
How do you prefer to receive
an intercom call?
312
User Manual
2
A PDN button
Ringing (Tone Call)
1
Directly—The party’s voice
is heard without ringing.
2
Ring only—Prohibiting the
caller switching to the voice
mode.
1
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Parallelled Telephone*1*3
Should the single line
telephone in parallel ring?
Forced Answerback
Selection*1
Do you prefer to answer a call
without going off-hook
regardless of the AUTO ANS
button status?
Live Call Screening Mode
Set*1
Which service do you prefer
when a calling party is
recording a message in your
mailbox?
LCS Mode Set (After
Answering)
Would you like to keep
recording after answering the
call in the LCS mode?
Automatic Call Waiting*4
Would you prefer to
automatically hear a call
waiting tone when you receive
a call while already on the
phone?
Manual Call Waiting
How would you prefer to
receive call waiting
notifications for intercom
calls?
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selection
Which type of call waiting tone
do you prefer?
Programming
Input
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
Selection & Parameter
0
No—The telephone will not
ring.
1
Yes—The telephone will
ring.
2
0
No—Disable
1
Yes—Enable
3
0
You can monitor the
message through the telephone
speaker. (Hands-free mode)
1
Only an alarm tone is heard.
(Private mode)
5
0
No—Stop recording
1
Yes—Keep recording
0
No—Off
1
Yes—On
0
No call (Off)
1
Tone (BSS)
6
0
1
2
Voice announcement
through the built-in speaker
(OHCA)*5
3
Voice announcement
through the handset (Whisper
OHCA)*6
0
Tone 1
1
Tone 2
2
User Manual
313
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
No—Off
0
Absent Message
Would you like to show a
message on the caller’s
telephone display?
4
0
message no. (1–
8)
Yes—Shows your personal
message.
9
Personal Absent Message
Creating your personal
message
4
5
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)
To forward or refuse some or
all of your incoming calls
message (max. 16 characters)
1
0
0
Off
1
Do Not Disturb (DND)
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
All—Forward all calls
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy—Forwarded when
your extension is busy.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
No Answer—Forwarded
when you do not answer.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy/No
Answer—Forwarded when you
do not answer or when your
extension is busy.
2
/
(for both calls)
3
5
1
(for outside calls)
4
5
2
(for intercom
calls)
5
FWD N/A Timer
To set the timer for "No
Answer" and "Busy/No
Answer"
Call Pickup Deny
Should you prohibit other
people from picking up your
calls?
Headset Operation*1*3
Do you use the headset?
Executive Busy Override
Deny
Do you prohibit other people
from joining your
conversation?
314
User Manual
5
6
6
6
Yes—Shows the selected
message.
(0–120) seconds
(Default: 15 seconds)
3
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Headset off
1
Yes—Headset on
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
1
2
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Programming
Input
Paging Deny*1
Would you like to prohibit
paging announcements?
6
Key Pad Tone Set*1
Do you prefer to hear the key
pad tone?
6
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Off
1
Yes—On
0
No—Off
3
4
Background Music (BGM)*1
Do you want background
music through your telephone
speaker while on-hook?
6
Bluetooth Registration*7
To register a Bluetooth
wireless headset on your
extension*8
6
6
Pass key (max. 16 digits)
Bluetooth Removal*7
To cancel the registration of a
Bluetooth wireless headset on
your extension*8
6
7
Confirm that the ID of your Bluetooth wireless headset
is displayed.
Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
To set your extension PIN or
change the stored extension
PIN
Extension Dial Lock
To prevent other people from
using your telephone
9
5
0
1
+ BGM no.
(1 digit)
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To set an extension PIN
stored extension
PIN +
new extension
PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To change the stored extension
PIN
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
0
9
1
Yes—On
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
1
To unlock
To lock
User Manual
315
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Display Lock*1
To prevent other people from
seeing your personal speed
dialling directory, call log,
SVM log, and from playing
back the voice messages in
your message box
One-touch Dialling
Assignment Mode
Selection
Do you prefer to set the
One-touch dialling only?
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
Programming
Input
9
2
Selection & Parameter
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
0
To unlock
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
1
To lock
0
No—Normal (Any Flexible
buttons can be modified.)
1
Yes—Only One-touch
dialling buttons can be modified.
However, to modify them, there
is no need to enter "2" before the
number.
#
Not available for a PS.
Only available for KX-T7633/KX-T7636/IP-PTs (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321)/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-DT543/KX-DT546
telephones.
Not available for the KX-T7665.
This setting applies to both outside and intercom calls. For intercom calls, this feature must be enabled through system programming.
Only available for certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for IP-PTs and certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephones.
Registering and cancelling a Bluetooth wireless headset may take time. Please avoid any interruption during that time by, for example,
going off-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
316
•
After the programme number is entered, the programme title is displayed.
The programming screen can be changed with the Navigator Key (Up or Down).
•
You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling
PROG.
1
0
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
phone no.
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Enter personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
name
Enter name*
(max. 20 characters).
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
•
* To enter characters, refer to "
Entering Characters".
User Manual
317
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To edit the names and numbers of personal speed dialling
PROG.
1
0
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
Enter personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
To erase a number or character
CLEAR
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Press "CLEAR".
OR
To insert a number or character
Press ENTER
or STORE.
number/character
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Enter a number or
character.
It will be inserted in front
of the selected part.
Clearing Features
You can clear or change to features as follows:
Features
318
Default Setting
Display Switching Mode
Automatic
Hot Line
Off
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Allow
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Caller ID assigned on your
extension
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Intercom
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
The longest ringing line
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Ringing (Tone Call)
Parallelled Telephone
Paired SLT will ring
Forced Answerback Selection
Disable
Live Call Screening Mode Set
Hands-free mode
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Features
Default Setting
LCS Mode Set (After Answering)
Stop recording
Automatic Call Waiting
Off
Manual Call Waiting—Intercom Calls
Off (No call/No tone)
Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
Tone 1
Absent Message
Off
Personal Absent Message
Cleared
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—Intercom/Outside
Calls
Off
FWD N/A Timer
15 seconds
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Headset Operation
Headset off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Paging Deny
Allow
Key Pad Tone Set
On
Background Music (BGM)
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR]
Allow
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
To change the above features back to their default settings
PROG.
PROG.
OR
OR
OR
PAUSE
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
•
OR
Enter ##.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
If you do not desire that the Call Waiting, FWD/DND or Hot Line to be cleared by this feature,
please ask your dealer.
User Manual
319
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons and/or programmable feature (PF) buttons on PTs, Add-on Key
Modules, and PSs. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons.
•
•
•
To enter programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
The buttons in the table below can only be set on certain flexible buttons, as follows:
– Flexible buttons on PTs/Add-on Key Modules/PSs: all buttons can be set.
– Flexible buttons on DSS Consoles: all buttons except CTI and Primary Directory Number
(PDN) buttons can be set.
– Programmable feature (PF) buttons: only the One-touch Dialling button can be set.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot customise the flexible buttons with the
following method from your phone. You can customise the flexible buttons using Web
Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Customising the Flexible Buttons".
To enter the programming mode
To programme
To exit
To continue
PROG.
PROG.
programming
input
OR
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
PAUSE
Press desired
flexible button.
Button
Follow
programming input.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Programming Input
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
#
+ Outside line group no. (2 digits)
Single-CO (S-CO)
0
+ Outside line no. (3 digits)
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
1
+ Extension no.*12
One-touch Dialling*1
2
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
3
Message
4
Message for Another
Extension
320
#
*2
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
0
+ delayed ringing time [0–7])*3
0
4
0 + Extension no./Incoming call distribution group
extension no.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
4
1
FWD/DND—Outside calls
4
2
User Manual
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no. (+
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Button
Programming Input
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
4
3
Group FWD—Both calls
4
4
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Group FWD—Outside calls
4
5
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Group FWD—Intercom
calls
4
6
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Account
4
8
Conference
4
9
Terminate
5
0
External Feature Access
(EFA)
5
1
Call Charge Reference
5
2
Call Park
5
3
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
5
3
Call Log*4
5
4
Call Log for ICD Group*4
5
4
Log-in/Log-out
5
5
Log-in/Log-out of a
specified group
5
5
Log-in/Log-out for all
groups
5
5
Hurry-up
5
6
Wrap-up
5
7
System Alarm*4
5
8
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
5
9
Answer*4
6
0
Release*4
6
1
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
6
2
+ Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7)
ISDN Service*6
6
3
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
+ Parking zone no. (2 digits)
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ 0/1/2/3*5 (+
#
+ Tenant no.)
User Manual
321
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Button
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
6
4
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
6
5
ISDN-Hold
6
6
Headset*4*7
6
7
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
6
8
(+ Tenant no.)
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)*8
6
9
+ Another PBX extension no.
CTI
7
0
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
7
1
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
7
2
Check-in*4
8
0
Check-out*4
8
1
Cleaned-up*4
8
2
+ Extension no. +
#
+ delayed ringing time (0–7)*9
Two-way Record*10
9
0 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail
floating extension no.
Two-way Transfer*10
9
1 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail
floating extension no.
One-touch Two-way
Transfer*10
9
1 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail
floating extension no. + # + Extension no./Incoming call distribution
group extension no.
Live Call Screening (LCS)*10
Voice Mail Transfer*10
322
Programming Input
User Manual
9
2
9
4 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail
floating extension no.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
•
*1 " ", "#", FLASH/RECALL, PAUSE, Secret (INTERCOM) and TRANSFER can also be
stored.
If you do not want to display the stored number when making a call, press the Secret
(INTERCOM) button before and after the numbers you wish to conceal.
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the
line access number.
<Example>
SECRET
49
1234
Account code feature no. Account code
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
#
0/9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
*2 For a PF button, "2" is not required to enter before the desired number.
*3 Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter delayed ringing time
(0: Immediate, 1: 1 ring, 2: 2 rings, 3: 3 rings, 4: 4 rings, 5: 5 rings, 6: 6 rings, 7: No ring). In
this case, you can automatically join a new ICD Group by creating a button for that group.
*4 This button is not available for a PS.
*5 0: Day/Night/Lunch/Break, 1: Day/Night/Break, 2: Day/Night/Lunch, 3: Day/Night
*6 Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)".
*7 This button is not available for the KX-T7665.
*8 The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings
of the PBX.
*9 It is possible to set delayed ringing for each SDN button.
*10 This button is used for the integrated voice mail features.
*11 The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
To exit at any time, lift the handset.
For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: After customising a flexible button,
Entering
you can set the displayed text for Self Labelling. To enter characters, refer to "
Characters".
*12 You can set a Unified Messaging port extension number as an extension number for the
DSS button.
You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
User Manual
323
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
To specify the ringing tones for each CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button (DPT/
IP-PT only)
To continue
(CO)
OR
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
(ICD Group)
OR
OR
(PDN)
(PDN)
OR
OR
(SDN)
(SDN)
PROG.
Press
PROGRAM.
•
OR
R.Tone
OR
OR
INTERCOM
INTERCOM
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM.
•
PROG.
tone type no.
Enter tone type
number.*
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM.
* Available tone types vary depending on the telephone you are using:
– KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT500 series/KX-DT300 series (except
KX-DT321)/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665): Tone types "01" to
"30" (01–20: tone, 21–30: melody) are available.
– KX-NT265/KX-NT321/KX-DT321/KX-T7665: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"01".
– Other telephones: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"02".
Only one ringing tone can be selected for all PDN buttons on your extension.
To clear the button
To continue
PROG.
PROG.
2
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
324
User Manual
Press
PROGRAM.
OR
PAUSE
Press desired
flexible button.
Enter 2.
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
3.2.1 User Programming
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance
Console
3.2.1 User Programming
You can edit your personal information as well as limited extension and mailbox settings using Web
Maintenance Console. (You can view menus and setting items, but you can edit only a limited number of items.)
In addition, you can download the UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook. For details, refer to
"
IMAP" in "1.8.6 Other Features".
–
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
–
–
Edit User Screen
–
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
–
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
Logout
–
•
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
This step is required only when accessing Web Maintenance Console for the first time.
•
•
For the IP address of the PBX, login name, and password, ask your System Administrator.
If the configuration of the Web browser or PC changes, the certificate may need to be installed
again. Once a certificate has been installed, Web Maintenance Console will be displayed
after step 2.
1. Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar, and then press Enter.
2. If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using SSL, a security alert window is displayed. Follow the
prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console, the login window is displayed, and a login name
and password must be entered.
User Manual
325
3.2.1 User Programming
•
If you attempt to log in, but enter an incorrect password three times, you may not attempt to
log in again for a 5 minute period.
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
For security, change the password the first time that you programme the PBX.
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers or characters be used for
maximum protection against unauthorised access.
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Edit User Screen
The Edit User screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
On this screen, you can edit various user settings.
To finish editing, click OK.
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Changing Your User Name and Displayed Language
You can change your account’s first name, last name, and displayed language in the User Information tab of
the Edit User screen. The information entered in First Name and Last Name are displayed on your telephone.
1.
In the User Information tab, edit your First Name (max.
20 characters) and Last Name (max. 20 characters),
and select the displayed language from the Change
Language drop-down list.
2.
Click OK.
Changing Your Contact Information
You can change your extension PIN and contact information (home number, mobile number, fax number, and
e-mail address) in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen. E-mail address(es) specified in Email 1–3 in the
Contact tab are used for e-mail notifications of missed outside calls.
326
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Contact tab, edit Extension PIN (max. 10 digits),
Fax, Phone (Home), Phone (Mobile), and Email 1–3.
Note
Click Edit to edit the extension PIN.
Entry for the extension PIN is hidden and displayed
as dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Changing Your Mailbox Password
You can change your mailbox password in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Edit for Mailbox
Password.
To change your message client password, click Edit for
Mailbox Password (Message Client).
2.
Enter a password in Enter new password, and then
re-enter it in Confirm new password.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
3.
Click OK.
Registering a Prompt to the Mailbox
You can display, play, record or delete the following prompts:
• Mailbox Owner Name (refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name")
• Personal Greetings (refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages")
– No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting, Caller ID Greeting*1, Temporary
Greeting and Absent Message
• Interview Mailbox Questions*2 (refer to "
Interview Mailbox")
*1
• Personal Caller ID Name (refer to "
Personal Caller Name Announcement")
Personal Group Distribution Lists")
• Personal Distribution List Voice Label*2 (refer to "
*1
*2
This feature may be disabled depending on your COS settings.
This feature may be disabled depending on your system programming settings or mailbox settings.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Prompt
Registration.
2.
In the Prompt Registration box, select a tab for the
desired type of prompt.
User Manual
327
3.2.1 User Programming
To record a prompt
Select a Prompt No., and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
a. Specify the extension number of the telephone used
for recording, then click Connect.
b. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a
system prompt.
d. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you
wish to import.
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open to import the file.
e. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
a. Select the desired prompt.
b. Click Play/Record.
c. Click Play or Stop.
To delete a specific prompt
a. Select the desired prompt.
b. Click Delete.
c. Click OK.
Customising your mailbox setting
You can change your mailbox setting in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
328
User Manual
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Advanced setting.
2.
The Mailbox Settings box appears.
The following items are editable.
3.2.1 User Programming
Mailbox Parameters
Item
Description
Mailbox Password
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default password
is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned
automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters
in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK
Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client
software program. If a default password is programmed by an administrator,
that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters
in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Covering Extension
Enter a desired extension number you want to assign for transferring to your
Covering Extension in the box (1–8 digits).
Interview Mailbox
Enter an interview mailbox number you want to assign for your mailbox in
the box (2–8 digits [the maximum number of digits may be less than 8,
depending on system programming]).
All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox
Select Yes or No.
If Yes is selected, calls are automatically forwarded to your mailbox.
Call Transfer Sequence
(Selection), Call Transfer
Sequence (Other)
Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each
mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence (Personal Transfer
Sequence).
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of
0–9, , # and special codes:
• D: Disconnecting
• F: Flash (Recall)
• R: Ringback Tone Detection
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• X: Extension Dialling
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
No Answer Time
(Selection), No Answer
Time (Other)
Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before
handling unanswered calls to the extension.
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s.
User Manual
329
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
330
Description
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it
reaches your extension.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
• Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5: Transfers the caller
to one of the specified telephone numbers in numerical order of
priority.
3. Click OK to finish.
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is
no answer.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Incomplete Call Handling
for Busy
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the
extension is busy.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
Call Transfer Anytime in
Incomplete Handling Menu
Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call
while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call
Handling menu.
Advanced Call Transfer Setting
Item
Advanced Call Transfer
Setting
Description
By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling,
you can create call handling "scenarios" for your extension. Up to 20
scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each absent
message in Scenario Setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Edit for creating scenarios.
Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down list.
Type the scenario name in the Scenario Name box.
Assign the following options in each section. Click OK when finished.
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
User Manual
331
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Selection
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Leave a Message: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
VIP Filter
If "Leave a Message" is selected for Selection and "Enable" is selected
for this setting, calls from certain phone numbers will be transferred
directly to your extension or specified telephone number.
• Telephone Number 1, 2, 3: Specifies the telephone numbers that
the VIP Filter setting will be applied to. When a call is received from
any of the numbers specified here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination specified in Transfer to (Selection).
• Transfer to (Selection): Specifies the transfer destination for calls
transferred according to the VIP Filter setting.
– Extension: The call is transferred to your extension.
– Other: The call is transferred to the telephone number that is
specified in Transfer to (Other).
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu
Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to
specified Custom Service Menu" is selected for Selection.
Transfer to specified telephone number - 1
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, specifying a
telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number.
Enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
332
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, and the call could
not be transferred to the number specified in Transfer to specified
telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according to these
settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
1. Select Other, Extension, or Covering Extension.
2. If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting
of 0–9,
, and #.
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to
the specified Custom Service.
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to
the specified Custom Service.
Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in Advanced Call Transfer Setting.
A scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use
according to the Absent Message setting of your extension.
• Current Scenario: The scenario that is assigned to the absent message
currently set at your extension is displayed here.
• Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario
indefinitely. A scenario set here will be used regardless of your extension
status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
• Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the
corresponding Absent Message is set at your extension.
User Manual
333
3.2.1 User Programming
Notification Parameters
Item
Description
Message Waiting Lamp
If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of your telephone turns on
when a new message is recorded.
Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device.
The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3.
Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and set program the settings, then click
OK to finish.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent.
Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. You can also specify the
number to be dialled by entering it from your telephone, allowing you to set
this feature on a case by case basis.
Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• X: Callback Number Entry Code
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
Note
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside
telephone numbers.
No. of Retries
Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send
notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device is busy.
No Answer Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
334
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. You can
also specify the use mode from your telephone:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is
called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify
the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK.
Telephone
Device—Device
Notification
Timer—Device Start Delay
Time (0-120 min)
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received
before sending message waiting notification.
Telephone
Device—Device
Notification
Timer—Device Interval
Time between Device 1, 2,
3 and Next Device
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting
Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
E-mail/Text Message
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3
You can be notified by e-mail when a new message is recorded in your
mailbox.
Click Edit for the extension to schedule, program the settings, and click
OK to finish.
Note
You can be notified by e-mail when an outside call is missed. For details,
refer to "Changing Your Contact Information" in "3.2.1 User
Programming").
User Name
Specifies the name of the user of the device.
E-mail Address
Specifies the e-mail address of the device.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent
messages.
Title Order
Specifies the format of the title of the notification.
User Manual
335
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Title String
Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.
Callback Number
Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification (max. 32
digits).
Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the
Message Waiting Notification.
Attach Voice File
Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the
notification e-mail.
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is
called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify
the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message
system after they are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send
(Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax File).
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK.
External Message Delivery
Item
Description
External Message Delivery
Active
If set to "Yes", you are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature.
External Message Delivery
Prompt Mode
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the
system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective", the
receiver has a choice of prompts.
Auto Forwarding
Item
Auto Forwarding Active
336
User Manual
Description
If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards
messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another
mailbox.
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Auto Forwarding Mailbox
Number
Auto Forwarding Delay
Time
Description
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.
Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before
forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time,
or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Auto Forwarding Mode
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox.
When set to "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in the original
mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded to
the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Auto Forwarding Mode Message Remains New
Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new.
This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to
"Copy".
Auto Forwarding Expires
Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will
expire.
User Manual
337
3.2.1 User Programming
Personal Custom Service
Item
Personal Custom Service
Description
Specifies the Personal Custom Service.
Note
•
Make sure to add an outside line access number when you store an
outside telephone number.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of
outside telephone numbers.
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1. Click Edit.
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation.
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value from
the following.
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages
in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller to a specified
extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to access Voice
Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to
access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers the caller to a
specified outside telephone number. Enter the Outside Numbers list
index (1-4).
• Page the party: Pages you.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.
4. Click OK when finished.
Outside Numbers
338
User Manual
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer
to outside (specified number)" operation in the Personal Custom Service
settings.
1. Click Edit.
2. Enter Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and
special codes:
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
3. Click OK when finished.
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
No DTMF Input Operation
Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial
anything) is received after the Personal Greeting:
• Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message.
• Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the
time of day.
• Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only after
hours.
No DTMF Input Operation
Wait Time
Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in
No DTMF Input Operation is performed (0–10 s).
Personal Distribution List
Item
List 1–4 Members
Description
Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several
mailboxes in a single operation. A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with
each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1. Click Edit for a Personal Distribution List (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox
to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.
Remote Call
Item
Remote Call Telephone
Number 1, 2 [0–9, *]
Description
Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are
forwarded when you set Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers can
be specified per mailbox.
Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access
number (to seize an outside line).
Note
This feature may be disabled by system programming for your mailbox.
User Manual
339
3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Login
item
Description
Auto Login Extension
When this item is set to "Enable", you are able to access your mailbox directly
without entering the mailbox number. You can automatically log in from your
extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as
a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified
DID number or trunk. When logging in from outside telephones, the Toll
Saver feature is also available.
Auto Login Extension
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not
allowed access to that mailbox.
Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
Specifies the telephone number from which you can automatically be logged
in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these
numbers, the caller (you) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox.
Auto Login Caller ID
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is
performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1
or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not
allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
Auto Login Toll Saver
340
User Manual
Allows you to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not
new messages have been recorded in your mailbox by the number of rings
you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your calls. Toll
Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login; you can
use Toll Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is
stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to
a specified DID number or trunk:
• Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature.
• DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed
DID number from the PBX.
• Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received
that matches one of the preprogrammed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
• Trunk: Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the
preprogrammed trunk.
3.2.1 User Programming
Direct Service
Item
Direct Service UM
Extension
Description
Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified
Messaging extension number:
• Record No Answer Greeting: You can record the greeting played when
there is no answer.
• Record Busy Greeting: You can record the greeting played when their
extension is busy.
• Record After Hours Greeting: You can record the greeting played
when the system is in night mode.
• Record Temporary Greeting: You can record a greeting that is used
exclusively until you disable it.
• Change Day Main Menu: Change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Night Main Menu: Change the Night Main Menu greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Emergency Greeting: Change the Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this Direct
Service Access.
Announce Number of Messages
Item
Description
Subscriber Service - All
New Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - All
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of all messages in your
mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - New
Voice Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - New
Urgent Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
marked as urgent in your mailbox when you log in.
Receiving Message
Service - All New
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - All Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number all messages in your
mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Voice
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Urgent
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new urgent
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
User Manual
341
3.2.1 User Programming
Message Client
Item
Message Client Display
Language
Description
Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the
mail (IMAP) client.
Changing Forward/Do Not Disturb Setting
You can change your extension’s Forward/Do Not Disturb settings for outside and intercom calls in the
Telephony Feature tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, set Forward/Do Not
Disturb as follows:
• For Outside Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For external calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)*1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
• For Intercom Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For internal calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)*1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
*1
These phone numbers are set in the Contact tab of the Edit
User screen.
Note
To apply settings to both outside and intercom calls,
click For both internal calls and external calls.
When you select this, the setting of For external
calls is applied to both outside and intercom calls.
2.
Click OK.
Storing names and numbers in personal speed dialling
You can set frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100
Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed at your extension for your personal use.
342
User Manual
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Speed Dialling
View/Edit.
2.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets
of 20. Select the desired set from Index.
3.
Enter the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number
to call in Speed Dialling - Personal Name (max. 20
characters).
4.
Enter the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed
Dialling number in Speed Dialling - Personal Number
(max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, T [Transfer], [ ]
[Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
3.2.1 User Programming
5.
Click OK.
Customising the Flexible Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons on PTs, Add-on Key Modules, PSs, and KX-UT133/KX-UT136/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phones. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature
buttons.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Flexible Button
View/Edit.
2.
To set the flexible buttons, specify each button on the
Flexible Button screen.
Follow the table below to set each parameter. When you
finish, click OK.
Button
Steps
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Select Loop CO from Type.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Group-CO (G-CO)
Select Group CO from Type.
Then specify the outside line group number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Single-CO (S-CO)
Select Single CO from Type.
Then specify the outside line number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Select DSS from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
Select One-touch from Type.
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
#, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
,
Note
•
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line
access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified
account code before the line access number.
<Example>
One-touch Dialling
SECRET
•
49
1234
#
0/9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code
feature no.
Account
code
Account code
delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
Use only 0–9, , and # for One-touch Dialling buttons. If characters
other than these are stored, they will be considered invalid. Only the
digits up to an invalid character will be sent when using that
One-touch Dialling button.
User Manual
343
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
344
Steps
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Select ICD Group from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Message
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Message for Another
Extension
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Then enter the extension number or incoming call distribution group
extension number in Extension Number.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Select FWD/DND (Both) from Type.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Select FWD/DND (External) from Type.
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Select FWD/DND (Internal) from Type.
Group FWD—Both calls
Select Group Fwd (Both) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Select Group Fwd (External) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Intercom
calls
Select Group Fwd (Internal) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Account
Select Account from Type.
Conference
Select Conference from Type.
Terminate
Select Terminate from Type.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Select EFA from Type.
Call Charge Reference
Select Charge from Type.
Call Park
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Specific from Parameter Selection.
Specify the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number).
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Automatic from Parameter Selection.
Call Log
Select Call Log from Type.
Call Log for ICD Group
Select Call Log from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select None from Parameter Selection.
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Steps
Log-in/Log-out of a
specified group
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select Incoming Group from Parameter Selection.
And, enter the Incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out for all
groups
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select All from Parameter Selection.
Hurry-up
Select Hurry-up from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Wrap-up
Select Wrap-up from Type.
System Alarm
Select System Alarm from Type.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Select Time Service from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select which time modes will be switched
manually.
In Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number), select the Time
Table (tenant number) to be used for changing time modes in Automatic
Switching mode.
Answer
Select Answer from Type.
Release
Select Release from Type.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
Select TRS Level Change from Type.
Then select the Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7) from Parameter
Selection.
Select ISDN Service from Type.
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
#, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
ISDN Service
,
Note
Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone
company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)".
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Select CLIR from Type.
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
Select COLR from Type.
ISDN-Hold
Select ISDN Hold from Type.
Headset
Select Headset from Type.
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Select Time Service - Automatic/Manual from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select the Time Table (tenant number) to be
used when Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
User Manual
345
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
346
Steps
Select NDSS from Type.
Then enter the another PBX extension number in Dial (max. 16 digits
consisting of 0–9).
Note
The button may not be available depending on the networking method in
use or the settings of the PBX.
CTI
Select CTI from Type.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Select PDN from Type.
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Select SDN from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
In Parameter Selection, specify the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving
at an SDN button.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Check-in
Select Check In from Type.
Check-out
Select Check Out from Type.
Cleaned-up
Select Cleaned Up from Type.
Two-way Record
Select Two-way Record from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Two-way Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Specify the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record
conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer in Ext No. of Mailbox.
(For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of
an extension each time.
One-touch Two-way
Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Enter extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number
to Ext No. of Mailbox.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Select LCS from Type.
Voice Mail Transfer
Select Voice Mail Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
DN
*1
Steps
Select DN from Type.
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
•
•
For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: You can set the text displayed for
each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible
Button screen.
For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users: You can set the text displayed (a maximum of 10
characters) for each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on
the Flexible Button screen.
Changing Your Password
You can change your password for the Web Maintenance Console in the Login Account tab of the Edit
User screen.
1.
In the Login Account tab, Password (4–16 characters
in length) can be edited.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
If you are designated as a supervisor for Automatic Two-way Recording, you can set the recording for
extensions you are supervising and listen to the recorded conversations as messages through Web
Maintenance Console. Calls to and from specified extensions can be automatically recorded to a mailbox. For
each targeted extension, the following types of calls can be recorded:
• Intercom (internal) calls
• Outside (external) calls
• Incoming ICD group calls only (i.e., when recording outside calls, limit recording to incoming ICD group
calls only)
You can receive an e-mail notification when Automatic Two-way Recording is used. The recorded conversation
can also be sent as an attachment to the e-mail. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
User Manual
347
3.2.1 User Programming
•
•
•
•
•
This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording
supervisors.
Forwarded calls and calls retrieved from being on hold will also be automatically recorded.
However, conference calls will not be recorded.
Recording will automatically stop when the mailbox reaches its capacity. Delete older
messages in order to use this feature again.
If the enabled extension has a Two-way Record button assigned to it, the button will flash
during recording. However, that button cannot be used to cancel this feature.
An extension whose conversation is being recorded cannot be the target of the following
features:
– Executive Busy Override
– Whisper OHCA
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded.
Editing Recording Settings
On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed. You can specify which
types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® Automatic Two-way Recording ® Edit a Recording.
2. For an extension, click the setting for Internal call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Select On or Off for that setting.
4. Click OK when finished.
Viewing and Playing Messages
Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® Automatic Two-way Recording ® Record List.
2. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list.
3. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
4. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
5. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that match
those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or external calls,
or specify both.
348
User Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
•
•
•
•
•
Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or specify
both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or
"Both".
Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
(play) button.
3. Click the
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
(play) button.
4. Click the
Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the
specific mailbox to enable the
(play) button.
(play) button will be disabled. Select a
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which
to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 1, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.
Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the
(logout) button to end the programming session and
return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX
to the System Memory.
(logout) button.
1. Click the
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
•
If the computer running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is
shut down, or the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved will be lost.
Always end your programming session by clicking the
(logout) button. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
User Manual
349
Section 4
Customising Extensions and the System–for
Managers
This section shows managers how to customise the
PBX’s extension and system settings according to their
needs. Find the desired setting and program as
necessary.
User Manual
351
4.1.1 Programming Information
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1.1 Programming Information
The manager can programme the following items.
• Call Charges
• Other Extensions Control
Available Extension
The extension assigned as a manager
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (2 lines or more)
(e.g., KX-NT343, KX-NT546, KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
Manager Password
To enter programming mode, the manager password (max. 10 digits) is required. (Default: 1234)
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
The PBX has a default password preset. For security, change the password the first time that you
programme the PBX.
It is strongly recommended that a password of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in the
Entering Characters".
password, refer to "
To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others,
the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Conditions
The programming extension must be idle, on-hook and holding no calls.
352
User Manual
4.1.2 Manager Programming
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Changing Call Charges and Extension Control
To enter the programming mode
To exit
To programme
PROG.
PROG.
To continue
1
OR
manager
password
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Enter
or PAUSE.
1.
Enter manager
password.
OR
programming
input
PAUSE
Follow
programming
input.
Press
HOLD.
Item
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Programming Input
Changing the manager password.
0
0
+
+ Password (max. 10 digits) +
Viewing extension call charges.
0
1
+
+ Extension no.
Clearing extension call charges.
0
1
+
+ Extension no. +
Setting the budget for extension call
charges.
0
2
+
+ Extension no. + Charge* +
Viewing call charges for each verification
code.
0
3
+
+ Verification code
Clearing call charges for each verification
code.
0
3
+
+ Verification code +
Setting the budget for each verification
code.
0
4
+
+ Verification code + Charge* +
Viewing call charges for each outside line.
0
5
+
+ Outside line no. (3 digits)
Assigning a charge rate for each outside
line group.
0
6
+
+ Outside line group no. (2 digits) +
+
Charge rate* +
Clearing all charges.
0
7
+
+
Printing the total call charge.
0
8
+
+
Locking/unlocking other extensions.
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
9
0
+
+ Extension no. +
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
extensions.
+
0
9
1
(to lock)/
(to unlock) +
1
+
+ Extension no. +
User Manual
353
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Item
Programming Input
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
verification codes.
Setting the verification code PIN.
9
2
+
+ Verification code +
9
3
+
+ Verification code + PIN (max. 10
digits) +
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (verification code PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
•
354
User Manual
* To enter a decimal point, press
.
Section 5
Appendix
This section provides the List of Operations by
Telephone Type, the Troubleshooting, the Feature
Number Table and Tone List. Check the
Troubleshooting section before consulting your dealer.
User Manual
363
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem
The telephone does not work properly.
Remedy
•
•
The telephone does not respond when buttons
are pressed.
•
The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
2.1.1 Extension Control)
Some features do not work.
•
System management may restrict certain
features.
Consult your manager.
The feature numbers have changed.
Confirm the revised number and try again.
•
372
Confirm with your manager that your
settings are correct.
If the problem persists, consult your dealer.
Even though following the manual instructions,
none of the operations work when using a
proprietary telephone.
•
The Intercom line was not seized. The seized
line, when going off-hook, was changed by
3.1.2 Settings on the
personal setting. (
Programming Mode)
In the manual, going off-hook means an
Intercom line is seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the
INTERCOM or PDN button after going off-hook
and follow the instructions.
The parallelled single line telephones do not ring.
•
"No ring" may be selected.
1.9.11 Setting
Change the setting to ring. (
the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone))
My proprietary telephone does not have a feature
button.
•
Some models do not have the feature
button.
Change a flexible button to the desired
button. (
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
Enter the specified feature number instead
of the feature button. (
1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones)
User Manual
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
A reorder tone is audible or "Restricted" is
displayed.
Remedy
•
•
•
The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
2.1.1 Extension Control)
Toll restriction is activated.
Consult your manager or dealer.
An account code is required.
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions,
(
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
in 1.2.1 Basic Calling)
I cannot make an outside call using the
One-touch Dialling button or speed dialling.
•
A line access number was not stored.
A line access number is required for
outside calls. (
1.2.1 Basic Calling,
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
I cannot remember the feature numbers.
•
If the feature numbers have been changed
from the default values, write the new feature
numbers in the table in "5.3.1 Feature Number
Table".
Ask your dealer to change the feature
numbers for easier use.
•
While talking to an outside party, the line is
disconnected.
•
The time limit has run out.
(
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer),
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation)
Consult your dealer to extend the time limit,
if necessary.
Redialling does not function.
•
The dialled number was more than 32
digits. (
1.2.3 Redial)
I cannot have a conversation using the Bluetooth
headset.
•
Make sure that the headset is properly
registered to the module.
Make sure that the headset is properly
charged according to the manual of the
headset.
Remove the wired headset from the
headset jack. Priority is given to the wired
headset when both are connected.
•
•
I cannot register, de-register, or confirm the ID of
the Bluetooth headset.
•
Make sure that the module is properly
installed in the IP-PT/DPT.
The PC and fax machine communication failed.
•
An indication tone may have interrupted
communication. (
1.9.9 Protecting Your
Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security))
User Manual
373
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Remedy
I do not want to show my telephone number to the
calling or called party’s telephone.
•
(
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone
Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s
Telephone (Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR]), 1.9.6 Preventing Your
Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s
Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR]))
I want to show my telephone number to the
calling or called party’s telephone.
•
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone
(
Number on the Called Party and Caller’s
Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP]).
I cannot send a call waiting tone to the dialled
extension.
•
The other party has not set the Call Waiting
feature.
(
Sending a Call Waiting Notification
(Call Waiting), 1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting,
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/
Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA))
The other party has set Data Line Security.
(
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security))
•
374
I forgot the password.
•
Ask the manager to assist you.
2.1.1 Extension Control)
(
The background music started suddenly.
•
Turn off the music.
(
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music
(BGM), 2.1.4 Turning on the External
Background Music (BGM))
I do not want to display a number which is stored
in memory.
•
Conceal the number.
(
Storing Names and Numbers,
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
I want to confirm my extension number.
•
(
Your Extension Number in 1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones)
The date and time are not correct.
•
Set the date and time by system
programming.
Consult your dealer.
The visibility of the display is poor.
•
Change the Display contrast level.
(
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming
Mode)
I want to specify the ringing tones.
•
To specify the ringing tones for each CO,
(
ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button
(DPT/IP-PT only), 3.1.3 Customising the
Buttons)
User Manual
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Remedy
The MESSAGE button light has lit up.
•
Another extension left you a message
waiting indication or someone left a
message in your mailbox while you were on
the phone or away from your desk.
An SDN button on my extension does not work.
•
A PDN button is not assigned on the
extension corresponding to your SDN
button.
Create a PDN button on the desired
extension. (
3.1.3 Customising the
Buttons)
I cannot use the secondary Ethernet port.
•
If you are using a KX-NT500 series
telephone, check whether ECO mode is
enabled (
Display in 1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones). If it is enabled, ask
your dealer to disable ECO mode. For other
types of IP-PTs, contact your dealer.
User Manual
375
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers.
If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers (new) in the list for future reference.
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To call an operator (Operator Call)
9/0
( )
To select an idle outside line
automatically (Automatic Line Access)
0/9
( )
To select an idle outside line in the
specified outside line group
automatically (Outside Line Group
Access)
8
( )
Making a Call to a Private Network
(TIE Line Access)
7
( )
private phone no.
Using an Account Code (Account
Code Entry)
49
( )
account code + # + outside phone no.
30
( )
personal speed dialling no. (2 digits) +
phone no. + #
outside phone no.
outside line group no. (2 digits) + outside
phone no.
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Using Numbers Stored at Your
Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
– To store
– To dial
+ personal speed dialling no. (2 digits)
( )
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX
(System Speed Dialling)
– To dial
To a Preset Number by Going
Off-hook (Hot Line)
system speed dialling no. (3 digits)
( )
740
( )
– To store
2 + phone no. + #
– To set
1
– To cancel
0
1.2.3 Redial
Redialling the Last Number You
Dialled (Last Number Redial)
376
User Manual
#
( )
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or
There is No Answer
To cancel callback ringing (Automatic
Callback Busy Cancel)/To cancel
(CCBS Cancel)
Leaving a Message Waiting
Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
46
( )
70
( )
For an extension leaving a message
waiting indication
– To leave/cancel
1/0 + extension no.
For an extension receiving a message
waiting indication
– To call back
2
– To clear
0 + your extension no.
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Using Your Calling Privileges at
Another Extension (Remote COS
Access)
To call with a verification code
(Verification Code Entry)
47
( )
extension no. + extension PIN + phone
no.
+ verification code + verification code
PIN + phone no.
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly
from Outside (Direct Inward System
Access [DISA])
Calling through DISA
– To an extension
(In All Security Mode only)
– To an outside party
(In Trunk Security Mode/All
Security Mode only)
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from
Another Extension or through DISA
(Remote Setting)
your extension no./( + verification
code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + extension no.
your extension no./( + verification
code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + outside phone no.
your extension no. + extension PIN +
feature no.
– From another extension
– Through DISA
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at
Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Answering a Call from Another
Telephone (Call Pickup)
User Manual
377
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
– Group
40
( )
group no. (2 digits)
– Directed
41
( )
extension no.
Denying Other People the
Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls
(Call Pickup Deny)
720
( )
– To deny
1
– To allow
0
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External
Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any
Station [TAFAS])
– Calls through an external speaker
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling
Parties (Malicious Call Identification
[MCID])
42
external pager no.
7 3
( )
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN
Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
62
( )
phone no.
61
( )
phone no. + #
Transferring to an Outside Party
Using the SIP Service
– Blind Transfer
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To hold (Call Hold)/To retrieve a call
(Call Hold Retrieve)
50
( )
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
– Specified with a held line number
53
( )
outside line no. which is held (3 digits)
– Specified with a holding extension
51
( )
extension no. which has a held call
number
Holding in a System Parking Zone
(Call Park)
52
( )
– To set
parking zone no. (2 digits)/
– To retrieve
stored parking zone no. (2 digits)
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
378
User Manual
50
( )
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Answering Call Waiting from the
Telephone Company
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
60
( )
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Adding a Third Party during a
Conversation Using the ISDN Service
(Three-party Conference [3PTY]—by
ISDN)
phone no. + TRANSFER button + 3
62
( )
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
Forwarding Your Calls (Call
Forwarding [FWD])/
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not
Disturb [DND])
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
– To set the timer for "No Answer"
and "Busy/No Answer"
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
713
( )
0 (Cancel)/
1 (Do Not Disturb [DND])/
2 (All calls) + phone no. + #/
3 (Busy) + phone no. + #/
4 (No Answer) + phone no. + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + phone no. + #/
7 (Follow Me) + your extension no./
8 (Follow Me Cancel) + your extension
no.
00–99 (second)
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD]
for your Incoming Call Distribution
Group)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN
Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by
ISDN)
714
( )
715
( )
716
( )
1 (Set) + ICD Group extension no. +
phone no. + #/
0 (Cancel) + ICD Group extension no.
7 5
( )
– To set
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 2 (Unconditional)/3 (Busy)/4 (No
Reply) + phone no. + #
– To cancel
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 0
– To confirm
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 1
User Manual
379
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the
Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent
Message)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
750
( )
– To set
1–9 (+ parameter) + #
– To cancel
0
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial
Lock)
77
( )
– To lock
1
– To unlock
0 + extension PIN
– To make an outside call while your
extension is locked
47
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN +
phone no.
38
( )
1
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in
Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Recording a Normal Greeting
Message
– To record
– To play back
2
– To clear
0
Recording a Greeting Message for
Each Time Mode
– To record
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+1
– To play back
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+2
– To clear
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+0
To leave a voice message directly to
another extension’s message box
# + 6 + extension no.
Listening to Voice Messages Left
by Callers
3
Redirecting Your Calls to Your
Message Box
380
– Both Calls
710
( )
0 (Cancel)/
– Outside Calls
711
( )
2 (All Calls) + floating extension no. for
the SVM feature*7 + #/
User Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– Intercom Calls
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
712
( )
3 (Busy) + floating extension no. for the
SVM feature*7 + #/
4 (No Answer) + floating extension no. for
the SVM feature*7 + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + floating extension
no. for the SVM feature*7 + #
33
( )
paging group no. (2 digits)
1.7.1 Paging
Group Paging
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging
Announcement
– To answer
43
( )
– To deny
721
( )
– To allow
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
1
0
32
( )
– To call and start a conversation
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
– To call and make an announcement
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
Join After Time Out
– To make a conference group call
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
with an entry code
– To join a conversation with an entry
# + conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
code
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Voice Mail Transfer
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed
Reminder)
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ UM group’s floating extension no.*1 + #
760
( )
– To set
12H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (AM)/1 (PM) +
0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
– To cancel
0
User Manual
381
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call
Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement
[OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
– For intercom calls
(No call/Tone/OHCA/Whisper
OHCA)
– For outside calls
(No tone/Tone)
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone
Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected
Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/
COLP])
732
( )
0 (No call)/1 (Tone)/2 (OHCA)/3
(Whisper OHCA)
0 (No tone)/1 (Tone)
7 2
( )
– Public
1
– Your extension
2
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone
Number Being Displayed on the
Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line
Identification Restriction [COLR])
7 0
( )
– To show
0
– To prevent
1
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being
Displayed on the Called Party’s
Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
7 1
( )
– To show
0
– To prevent
1
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from
Joining Your Conversation (Executive
Busy Override Deny)
733
( )
– To prevent
1
– To allow
0
1.9.8 Turning on the Background
Music (BGM)
751
( )
– To set
BGM no. (1 digit)
– To cancel
0
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
382
731
( )
730
( )
– To set
1
– To cancel
0
User Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled
Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
39
( )
– Ring
1
– No Ring
0
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a
Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode)
48
( )
– To set
1 + paired wired extension no.
– To cancel
0
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel
with a Wired Telephone
(One-numbered extension)
48
( )
– To set
1 + paired wired extension no.
– To cancel
0
To pickup the call
41
( )
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your
Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
790
( )
paired wired extension no.
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out,
Wrap-up)
Log-in
736
( )
Log-out
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the
Call Status of an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Incoming Call
Distribution Group Monitor)
1 + ICD Group extension no./
0 + ICD Group extension no./
735
( )
1 (Not Ready)/0 (Ready)
ICD Group extension no.
*4
739
( )
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is
Connected
Doorphone Call
31
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
Opening a Door (Door Open)
55
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
56
( )
relay no. (2 digits)
1.11.2 If an External Relay is
Connected
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
User Manual
383
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Accessing External Services
(External Feature Access [EFA])
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
60
( )
service code
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All Calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ voice mail floating extension no. + #
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is
Connected
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
(Voice Mail Integration)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a
Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality
Features)
Setting a Timed Reminder to a
Room Extension (Remote Wake-up
Call)
*5
76
( )
– To set
12H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(AM)/1 (PM) + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(once)/1 (daily)
– To cancel
0 + extension no.
– To confirm
2 + extension no.
1.12.2 Recording Information Using
Preprogrammed Messages (Printing
Message)
1.13.1 Walking Extension
761
( )
message no. (+ parameter) + #
727
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN
727
( )
#
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
– To set an extension status to
Service-out
– To set an extension status to
+ your extension no. + extension PIN
Service-in
2.1.1 Extension Control
To lock/unlock other extensions
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
*2
384
– To unlock
782
( )
extension no.
– To lock
783
( )
extension no.
User Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
*3
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
Default
(New)
780
( )
– Day/Night/Lunch/Break
2.1.4 Turning on the External
Background Music (BGM)
*2
Additional digits/buttons
0/1/2/3
35
( )
– To start
external pager no. + BGM no. (1 digit)
+ BGM no. (1 digit)
– To stop
external pager no. + 0
+0
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages
(OGM)
*2
36
( )
– To record
1 + OGM floating extension no.*6
– To play back
2 + OGM floating extension no.*6
– To record from an external BGM
3 + BGM port no. (1 digit) + OGM floating
extension no.*6
(MOH) port
– To clear
0 + OGM floating extension no.*6
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an
Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy
Out)
785
( )
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
784
( )
*2
*2
outside line no. (3 digits)
another PBX extension no. + #
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone
(Personal Programming)
Assigning an Extension PIN to
Your Extension (Extension PIN
[Personal Identification Number])
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
799
( )
– To set
1 + extension PIN + # + same extension
PIN + #
– To cancel
0 + stored extension PIN
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Manager only
Manager and preprogrammed extension user only
Supervisor only
Hotel operator only
The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system programming. For more information, consult
your System Administrator or System Manager.
User Manual
385
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialling)
Default
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
1
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)/
Setting
Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber [CCBS])
3
4
5
6
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
Feature
(While dialling or talking)
Fixed Number
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
3
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
386
User Manual
5
5.5.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
5.5 Revision History
5.5.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx
Changed Contents
•
•
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
5.5.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
•
•
•
Feature Highlights
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
ACD Report Analysis
User Manual
391
For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record
the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to
aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.net/
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System
Networks Co., Ltd.
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014
PNQX6954XA DD0714AH2104
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement